Home

MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User`s Manual (Serial Communication)

1. CSPRPEPSHFFFPI ER A5NR Twisted pair cable Use commercial three pair type twisted cables of 0 3 mm or more The specifications of the cables used in wiring are shown MRS 485 cable specifications Cable type Shielded cable Number of pairs 3p Conductor resistance 20 C 88 0 O km or less Insulation resistance 10000 MQ km or more Voltage resistance 500 V DC 1 minute Electrostatic capacitance 1 kHz 60 nF km or less as an average Characteristic impedance 100 kHz 1104 10 Q 80 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring llCable structural drawing reference Example of three pair cable structural drawing llPoint of contact For details on cables such as specifications contact each cable manufacturer Available 10BASE T cables for PC LAN wiring can be used llSelection procedure when purchasing Cable type 10BASE T cable Category 3 or higher Connection specifications Straight type Connector RJ45 connector llPrecautions for using cables Pay attention to the following points when purchasing cables e 5 V DC is output to the PU connector of the inverters for supplying power to the PU Please cut pins No 2 and 8 of commercial cables to prevent wiring to pins No 2 and 8 BMJ 8 28N distributor is recommended The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port One
2. At the time of multi drop connection have an interlock so that the data is not sent simultaneously from multiple equipments 7F69H Parity error The parity bit settings do not match Match the settings of FX5 PLC and counterpart equipment A disturbance occurred in the line due to power supply Clear the error information by error initialization request YE ON OFF of the counterpart station YF Further when executing communication by non There is noise on the line protocol execute the input command and never read the data At the time of multi drop connection the data is sent that is not required simultaneously from multiple equipments Take counter measures for noise e At the time of multi drop connection have an interlock so that the data is not sent simultaneously from multiple equipments 7FE6H Remote Remote password does not match Check the remote password error and then execute password error communication again MError codes in CPU When an error is included in a message from the counterpart equipment in the communication between counterpart equipment and CPU unit a serial communication error occurs in the CPU unit Error flags If a communication error occurs in MC protocol the serial communication error flag turns ON Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON SM8500 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication Us Us un Error codes When the serial
3. s2 T4 INT gt 4 x 10 INT 55 81 10 30 ms Ts INT 41 x 10 10 ms Te 1 INT UES TSE y 10 INT 41 x 10 INT 22 1 x10 10 30 ms 10 10 T7 1 Te 1 T9 1 7 8 12 19 8 ms T7 1 Te 1 11 4 x 10 x 1000 7 8 ms Te 1 12 ms Te 2 NT NAA a a0 4 INT 2 1 x 10 2 INT T T7 2 Te 2 T9 2 8 9 30 38 9 ms T7 2 T9 2 x 13 4 x 10 x 1000 8 9 ms T8 2 30 ms Tinv T1 T2 T3 50 800 1 851 ms 4 5 Wiring This section explains about the wiring 19200 1 x10 10 50 ms 1 19200 Wiring procedure 1 Select the connection method Confirm the inverter connection method Page 78 Connection method 2 Make arrangements for wiring Prepare cables K Page 80 Cable distributors Page 82 Connection devices RJ45 connector and distributor and termination resistors Page 83 Termination resistor setting required for wiring 3 Turn OFF the PLC power Before wiring make sure that the PLC power is OFF 4 Wire the communication equipment Connect RS 485 communication equipment of PLC with the communication port of the inverter lt Page 84 Connection diagram 5 Set or connect termination resistors Set or connect termination resistor of the inverter farthest from the PLC Page 83 Termination resistor setting 6 Connect Ground a shielding wire Class D grounding When using a twisted pair c
4. 1100 Termination resistor selector switch Communication may be affected by noise echo depending on the transmission speed and transmission distance If communication is hindered by noise echo connect a termination resistor to the inverter lBiBuilt in RS 485 terminal A built in termination resistor is provided Connect a 100 termination resistor to the inverter farthest from the PLC Termination resistor selector switch 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring 83 84 MPU connector The customer needs to provide 100 Q 1 2 W termination resistors such as the following Brown Black Brown Precision 10 1 100 0 101 e Connect a termination resistor between pin No 3 RDA and pin No 6 RDB e Connect a distributor to the PU terminal because termination resistors cannot be connected e Connect a termination resistor only to the inverter located furthest away from the PLC BFR E7TR A built in termination resistor is provided Connect a 100 Q termination resistor to the inverter farthest from the PLC Termination resistor selector switch BFR A5NR Connect a termination resistor chip which is supplied together with the FR AS5NR between the RDB and RDR terminals of the inverter farthest from the PLC Shielded wiring Perform Class D grounding f
5. 168 213 Controlline leen 150 S Conversion variable 184 220 es el D seg eeene dd henda eee os 141 Second parameter specification code 117 Serial data communication 139 D Shielded dcs dequo dra cede en erg ion ic Oc QE RC ees 84 SS Staticdata ee 180 DislribUlOF as 22 de eee ee oe AL R8 a we 82 SUNT CHECK baad ween e ae EUR EUR i 141 Sum check code 000 e eee eee 149 F T Full duplex bi directional communication 148 Termination resistor 21 55 83 133 G Terminator llle 141 178 A Twisted paircable 19 53 80 131 Grounding 0 e008 22 57 89 136 H Half duplex bi directional communication 149 Header cee eee eee eee 140 177 I Inverter communication ls 69 Inverter instruction codes and parameters T1 Inverter operation control instruction 105 Inverter operation monitoring instruction 103 Inverter parameter block write 111 Inverter parameter read l l 107 Inverter parameter write a 109 L Length naaa anaa ores Secu s Kee eae 179 217 Link pattern a0 ae s dea eda eee oad am ocn 17 Link time leen 18 50 M MC protocol 0 eee ee ee eee 48 Multiple inverter commands 114 N N N Network 2 0 0 0 00000 ee eee ee eee 14
6. IVDR instruction is driven iL M1 ON 3 IVCK instruction is not driven I M2 OFF Processing of communication errors Communication errors include those that occur for all serial communication functions parity error overrun error framing error and those that occur during communication with the inverter A serial communication error results if either occurs Serial communication error SM8530 ON ON maintained Serial communication error SD8530 code Error code 7010H Parity error overrun error or framing error 76 H Inverter communication error L Page 121 You can create the following program for the corresponding instruction to check the inverter communication error code Program example Start command MO Instruction abnormal completion M102 Precautions for program creation llCommunication protocol setting If protocol of communication settings Page 95 for the serial port to be used is not set to Inverter Communication inverter communication instructions cannot be used llUsing inverter communication instruction together with another instruction A serial port using any other communication such as RS2 instruction cannot use inverter instruction and predefined protocol support instruction Page 212 Combined Use of Serial Communication 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 1 1 4 8 Programming 0 When programming an inverter communication instruction in a state of an STL instruction Do not turn state
7. 10BASE T 10BASE T dermminaven cable cable i Distributor e e Distributor e e Distributor H 10BASE T 10BASE T 10BASE T cable cable cable 10BASE T cable PU connector mE PU connector T PU connector Poin tr Because the termination resistor cannot be connected to the inverter use a distributor Cannot be connected to the built in Ethernet port of the CPU module BFR E7TR E700 Series only n the case of 1 to 1 connection When a distributor is not used Twisted pair cable n the case of 1 to n connection When a distributor is not used Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable FR E7TR FR E7TR FR E7TR 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring 79 BFR A5NR V500 Series only n the case of 1 to 1 connection When a distributor is not used FR A5NR ERES Twisted pair cable Lo Termination resistor n the case of 1 to n connection When a distributor is not used Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Termination resistor Twisted pair cable
8. Operation errors pertaining to the instruction are as follows ON 1810 When specified channel is used with another instruction ON 3600 When specified channel is not setting parameter ON 2820 When specified device exceeds the device range ON 3405 When the value specified for s1 is other than KO to 31 When the value specified for s2 is less than KO When the value specified for s3 s3 2 s2 1 is outside the range that can be specified Less than KO K3000 to 9999 K13000 to 32767 When the value specified for n is other than K1 to 4 112 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 8 Programming Program example Writes upper limit frequency Pr 1 120 Hz lower limit frequency Pr 2 5 Hz acceleration time Pr 7 1 second deceleration time Pr 8 1 second for inverter station No 5 from PLC CH1 Writing contents Parameter No 1 D200 2 D202 7 D204 8 D206 upper limit frequency D201 lower limit frequency D203 acceleration time D205 deceleration time D207 Initial pulse SM402 Write command ON Write command M10 Parameter No iind zd Pr 1 Maximum frequency MOVP K12000 D201 Maximum frequency 120 Hz Parameter No ROME DAUA Pr 2 Minimum frequency MOVP K500 D203 Minimum frequency 5 Hz Parameter No ai DANA Pr 7 Acceleration time MOVP D205 Acceleration time 1 s Parameter No eal Bene Pr 8 Deceleration time MOVP D207 Deceleration time 1 s D201
9. The S P CPRTCL instruction was executed while the Write the protocol setting data again to the CPU protocol setting data has an error module and execute the S P CPRTCL instruction e If this error persists even after the data is rewritten replace the module 7D10H Protocol The protocol No which had not been registered in the CPU Check the specified protocol No unregistration module was specified in the control data for the Check Protocol registration SD9111 to SD9114 to error S P CPRTCL instruction confirm that the specified protocol No is registered The S P CPRTCL instruction was executed without the Write the protocol setting data and execute the protocol setting data written S P CPRTCL instruction 7D12H Send e Send monitoring time has timed out Check if the cables are disconnected monitoring time Although the transmission was retried for the specified timeout error number of retries it did not succeed 7D13H Receive wait Receive wait time has timed out Check if the cables are disconnected timeout error Check if any errors occur on the counterpart device side 7D16H Protocol cancel A cancel request was accepted during protocol execution Check the cancelled protocol in the S P CPRTCL request error and the S P CPRTCL instruction was completed abnormally instruction s control data number of executions and eliminate the cause of the cancellation 7D17H Packet size A packet of more than 2048 bytes wa
10. MRS 485 cable specifications Items Description Cable type Shielded cable Number of pairs 2p 3p Conductor resistance 20 C 88 0 Q km or less Insulation resistance 10000 MQ km or more Voltage resistance 500 V DC 1minute Electrostatic capacitance 1 kHz 60 nF km or less as an average Characteristic impedance 100 kHz 1104 10 Q llCable structural drawing reference Pair N Shield AA oe B Example of two pair cable structural drawi Pen ee Mes ini Example of three pair cable structural drawing 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 1 5 5 Wiring 3 The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 22 to 0 25 N m AWG24 to 20 AWG 24 to 20 mowes 0am AWG FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port 0 3 to 0 5 mm 0 3 to 0 5 mm FX5 485 BD AWG22 to 20 AWG22 to 20 Precautions Do not tighten terminal screws with torque beyond the specified range Otherwise it may cause equipment failure or malfunction Wire end treatment With regard to the cable end treatment use a stranded cable or solid cable as is or use a wire ferrule with insulating sleeve When using a stranded cable or solid cable as is Twist the end of stranded wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Please do not solder plate the ends of the cable e c 5 mm 9 mm 0 27 0 36 When using a wire ferrule with insulation sle
11. o o i o ff f 0o e e J i e e Jot j j joe e fe 1 LST and C cannot be used 2 Bitspecification of word device cannot be used 8 Only nibble specification of bit device can be used 4 Nibble specification of bit device cannot be used 5 Only bit specification of word device can be used Writes value of s3 in parameter No s2 of station No s1 of inverter connected to communication channel n 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 1 4 8 Programming 09 Operation error Operation errors pertaining to the instruction are as follows ON 1810 When specified channel is used with another instruction ON 2820 When specified device exceeds the device range ON 3405 When the value specified for s1 is other than KO to 31 When the value specified for s2 is outside the range that can be specified Less than KO K3000 to 9999 K13000 to 32767 When the value specified for n is other than K1 to 4 ON 3600 When specified channel is not setting parameter Writes setting values to parameter shown in the following table for inverter station No 6 from PLC CH1 Example of program using second parameter specification code Page 117 of FREQROL F700P Series inverter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 902 10 Hz frequency C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 1902 100 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 903 200 Hz frequency C4 Termina
12. Program For details on operating procedures of GX Works3 refer to the manual below LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual 5 3 System Configuration This section outlines the system configuration required to use non protocol communication You can use up to a maximum of 4 channels FX5UC is maximum of 3 channels of non protocol communication in the CPU module using the built in RS 485 port communication board and communication adapters The serial port assignments are fixed to the following numbers regardless of the system configuration MFX5U CPU module BI X5UC CPU module CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH2 Communication board 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 129 5 2 Procedure before Operation nmunication device Built in RS 485 port CH1 Since it is built into the CPU module there is no need to add 50 m or less equipment Communication FX5 485 BD CH2 Mounted on top of the CPU module there is no change inthe 50 mor less board FX5 232 BD installation space requirements 45 mor lece Communication FX5 485ADP CH3 CH4 Mount the communication adapter to the left of the CPU 1200 m or less adapter FX5 232ADP module 15 m or less 1 Assigned to CH3 or CH4 in order of proximity to CPU module 5 4 Specifications This section descri
13. STX Data needed by the user When the data are not needed by the user and data contents and or the number of character vary Set a non verified reception element Variable number of characters MExample of packet setting Conversion l Header variable Non verified reception variable number of characters Terminator Using a non verified reception element has the following advantages in the case of the packet format shown above e Only the necessary data can be stored in the device memory of a CPU module and buffer memory e A single protocol packet can handle receive packets that includes data whose contents vary each time APPENDIX Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 231 Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table ASCII code table 8 bit code expressed in hexadecimal l i sm o em p m 9 6 j l n mj oijioi iuo i cdo o o o co N 2 o UJ o 232 APPENDIX Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table INDEX 0 to 9 P 10BASE T cable llle 81 Packet scare cuiss ore Bead od Oe dene LS 168 176 16 bit mode 2 cee ee ee 143 Predefined protocol support function 165 8 bit mode 2 145 Predefined protocol support instruction 191 Protool este deiude oh oe ee ee a ee ww a 170 C R Check code 0000 eee ee ees 189 225 e Command ces 59 RJ45 connector llle 82 Communication type
14. j e I I 1 1 T ST and C cannot be used 2 Bit specification of word device cannot be used 3 Only nibble specification of bit device can be used 4 Nibble specification of bit device cannot be used 5 Only bit specification of word device can be used Write the operation status of inverter corresponding to instruction code Page 71 of s2 for station No s1 of the inverter connected to the communication channel n in d1 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 1 4 8 Programming 03 Operation error Operation errors pertaining to the instruction are as follows ON 1810 When specified channel is used with another instruction ON 2820 When specified device exceeds the device range ON 3405 When the value specified for s1 is other than KO to 31 When the value specified for n is other than K1 to 4 ON 3600 When specified channel is not set with parameter Reads status H7A of inverter station No 0 into PLC CH1 stores the read value in M100 to M107 and outputs externally YO to Y3 Read contents Inverter operating M100 normal rotation M101 reverse rotation M102 error occurrence M107 San s1 s2 d1 n d2 L Head bit device number of instruction execution status output Communication channel 1 to 4 Read value storage destination Inverter instruction code hexadecimal Inverter running Inverter station number 0 to 31 AO Forward rotation M101 Inverter status m
15. n Used channel 0 0000 channel K1 to 4 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16_U d2 2 LC bit device number to which instruction execution status is ANYBIT ARRAY output Number of elements 3 1 Specify a channel No for which communication setting is set for inverter communication 2 Make sure not to use devices being used in other control operations Page 98 Applicable devices c e qe Tee jeje lee ee jesse e q a j Je ge p j Fd o a jJ o o JjJ MEM CENE LN LEN NEN LIN LI LR CON CREER e Jot J je o i T e 1 TLSTand C cannot be used 2 Bitspecification of word device cannot be used 3 Nibble specification of bit device cannot be used 4 Only bit specification of word device can be used This instruction executes multiple commands to an inverter connected to the communication channel n whose station number is specified in s1 Specify the send receive data type using s2 the head device which stores data to be written to the inverter using s3 and the head device which stores values to be read from the inverter using d1 114 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 8 Programming llSend receive data type The table below shows valid send data 1 and 2 and receive data 1 and 2 specified by the s2 send receive data type 0000H Run command expansion Set frequency RAM Inverter status monitor Output frequency speed
16. 0001H expansion Special monitor 0010H Set frequency RAM Output frequency speed 0011H EEPROM Special monitor e f a device number outside the range due to indexing etc is specified in d1 the receive data from the inverter is not stored in d1 However values set in s3 and s3 1 may be written to the inverter e f any unspecified value is set in s2 unexpected data may be written to and read from the inverter and values of d1 and d1 1 may be updated The IVMC instruction reads the inverter status at the time of communication with the inverter and stores it in d1 Accordingly the inverter status written by the IVMC instruction can be read when the next reading instruction IVCK IVMC etc is executed Operationerror Operation errors pertaining to the instruction are as follows ON 1810 When specified channel is used with another instruction ON 2820 When specified device exceeds the device range ON 3405 When the value specified for s1 is other than KO to 31 When the value specified for n is other than K1 to 4 ON 3600 When specified channel is not setting parameter ES gz te ean b ADD This instruction is applicable to the following inverters e FREQROL E700 series February 2009 and later e FREQROL A800 F700PJ F700P E700EX D700 Series Writes s3 run command expansion s3 1 setting frequency RAM and reads d1 inverter status monitor ex
17. Data Storage Area Send DO 1 0001H Value 9 00001 Signed Negative value Data Storage Area Send DO 1 FFFFH Value J39 00001 llReceiving ex Conversion ASCII Decimal HEX Number of Send Data 1 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 5 Unigned Receive Data Storage Area 65535 v T Signed Sign Character Receive Data Storage Area 0000 v vai Signed Negative value Receive Data Storage Area 0000 valu APPENDIX 2 2 1 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Operation of Number of Decimals llSending Fixed point Ex Conversion HEXASCII Decimal Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Number of Decimals 1 Data Storage Area DO 1234 04D2H D1 5678 162EH Variable Point Ex Conversion HEXASCII Decimal Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Data Storage Area o meum oi 10099 oe saen c wma Precautions Send Value P gt First data Value Second data Send Value Decimal point First data position area Value Decimal point Second data position area 123 4 067 8 123 4 0 678 An error occurs when a decimal point position is larger than the number of digits for variable point Example When the number of digits is 3 and the decimal point position is 1000 or larger
18. Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 2 mm or larger e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible Other equipment O 2 6 Communication Setting For the FX5 communication settings of this function parameters are set using GX Works3 For details about GX Works3 refer to LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual Setting of parameter differs according to the module used The procedure for each module is as follows For the communication settings of FX3 PLC refer to LLIFX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Built in RS 485 port CH1 XX Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt 485 Serial Port Window The following screen will be displayed if N N Network is set for the communication protocol type llBasic Settings E Communtcatran Pratace Type aCe Tete ues Ee ncs Communication Protocol Type MN Network lBlFixed Setting E Hast atar Na Set host station No Hast Station No ll Master i Total Number of Local Station Setconnection number of the local station Total Number of Local Station 7 E Refresh Range Set the pattern of the device mark that wants to communicate Refresh Range 0 HJ Timeout Retry Count Setting Set the retry counts when there is na local broadcasting statio
19. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS series MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety in order to handle the product correctly This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories N WARNING and N CAUTION N WARN NG Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by N CAUTION may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Make sure to set up the following safety circuits outside the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents Note that when the CPU module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the CPU module occurs in an input outp
20. SM8930 SM8940 SM8950 SM8151 SM8156 R Read only 124 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 10 Related Devices Precautions When Inverter communicating is ON instructions other than the instruction under execution cannot be executed Do not turn ON OFF by program or engineering tool If FX3 Series compatible SM SD area settings have been set the devices turn ON if an error occurs for an inverter communication instruction SM8152 SM8153 SM8157 SM8158 Turns ON when an inverter communication error occurs R Read only 1 Supports latch function After the devices above turns ON the error code is stored in the compatible devices below SD8152 SD8157 Inverter communication error code These devices store an error code when a communication latch error is caused by an inverter communication instruction Storing an error code is only for the first error occurrence and it is not updated for the second error occurrence onwards Do not turn ON OFF by program or engineering tool Inverter communication errors are not cleared even after communication is restored to normal state Devices are cleared when power is turned OFFON STOP gt RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON The devices turn ON when a parameter number or set value specified in IVBWR instruction is outside the allowable range SM8921 SM8931 SM8941 SM8951 SM8154 SM8159 These devices turn ON wh
21. a period which is not at the specified number of digits of data is received An error may also occur when Variable point is selected and a period which is at the head or end of a unit of data is received Delimiter When any other than No delimiter is selected a delimiter can be received However an error may occur when a delimiter which is not at a boundary of data is received BA data of which number of digits exceeds the upper limit is received When Number of Send Digits of Data is Variable Number of Digits an error may occur if the number of digits of received data exceeds the upper limit shown below Conversion unit Conversion content Upper limit of number data to be received Word ASCII Decimal HEX 5 digits ASCII Hexadecimal HEX 4 digits Double word ASCII Decimal HEX 10 digits ASCII Hexadecimal HEX 8 digits BA data whose decimal point position is greater than the number of digits is specified When Number of Decimals is Variable Point in a send packet a error may occur if the decimal point position is greater than the number of digits BA data whose number of digits is 0 is received When Number of Send Digits of Data is Variable Number of Digits an error may occur if the number of digits of received data is O MA data whose number of digits are fewer than the digits specified in Number of Send Digits of Data are received An error may occur if data whose number of digits are fewer than the digits spe
22. 1917 918 1918 919 1919 920 1920 926 1926 927 1927 928 1928 929 1929 932 1932 933 1933 Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers Pr 125 Pr 126 C2 to C7 and C22 to C25 902 1902 903 1903 904 C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 1904 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 905 C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 1905 C22 Frequency setting voltage bias frequency 922 Built in potentiometer C23 Frequency setting voltage bias 1922 Built in potentiometer C24 Frequency setting voltage gain frequency 923 Built in potentiometer C25 Frequency setting voltage gain 1923 Built in potentiometer Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905 and 917 to 920 920 No 1 terminal gain torque magnetic 920 1920 2920 flux Specify inverter parameter number in s2 s3 in IVBWR instruction as show below e In the case of parameter number 0 to 999 write the parameter number as is In the case of parameter number 1000 to 9999 write parameter number 10000 Example When parameter number is 1234 specify K11234 4 9 Troubleshooting This chapter explains troubleshooting and error codes Checking communication status based on LED display Check the status of the LED display of RD and SD on the CPU module or the communication board communication adapter On n Data is being transmitted and received On ff Data is being received but not being
23. 4 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Right click gt Add New Module After adding the expansion adapter make settings on the the screen displayed from the following operation 4 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt ADP1 to ADP6 Communication adapter gt Module Parameter Setting screen is the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 Parameter setting details Set the following items for the serial ports that use non protocol communication However only two channel can be set to the predefined protocol support function Basic Settings Extended Board When using this function select FX5 232 BD or FX5 485 BD Advanced Settings Communication Protocol Type When using this function select Predefined Protocol Support Function Data Length 7bit 8bit Parity Bit None Odd Even Stop Bit 1bit 2bit Baud Rate 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps 1 Only in the case of communication board CH2 Setting is not required fixed value for the board below Start bit 1 bit Header Not added Terminator Not added Control mode None Sum check code Not added Control procedure None 2 Can set it from packet setting 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 5 Communication Settings 69 6 6 Protocol Setting Protocols can be selected and edited from the libraries that are pre registered in GX Works3 or registered by the user Execute the
24. Built in RS 485 port Serial port Counterpart device Description The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers The product name of the software package SWnDND GXW3 for the MELSEC programmable controllers The n represents a version Generic term for separate manuals Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Startup Generic term for MELSEC iQ F FX5U User s Manual Hardware and MELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5U User s Manual Hardware Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Generic term for MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual MODBUS Communication MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication and MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual MODBUS Communication Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Positioning Control Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Analog Control Built in RS 485
25. Check communication specifications K Refer to Page 71 Specifications Applicable inverter Operation commands and parameters Execution time of inverter communication 2 System configuration and selection KL Refer to Page 70 System Configuration System Configuration Select communication equipment 3 Wiring K Refer to Page 77 Wiring Selection of cables and connection equipment Wiring example 4 Communication settings K Refer to Page 90 Inverter Communication Settings K Refer to Page 95 PLC Communication settings 5 Program creation K Refer to Page 97 Programming Detailed explanation of related devices Basic program For details on operating procedure of GX Works3 refer to the manual below LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual 4 3 System Configuration This section outlines the system configuration required to use inverter communication You can use the inverter communication function in the CPU module using the built in RS 485 port communication board and communication adapter Allotment of serial ports is set to the following fixed numbers regardless of system configuration MF X5U CPU module MF X5UC CPU module CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH2 Communication board 70 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION
26. M8029 X1 SET EN Command is latched MO IVCK d1 d2 Communication is executed Instruction execution complete SM8029 RST EM Command is reset npletion and error flag operation When multiple inverter communication instructions are programmed the following flags turn ON or OFF according to the execution result of each inverter communication instruction To acquire the result of each inverter communication instruction program as necessary just below the inverter communication instruction using these flags llRelated devices e Special relays SM8029 Instruction execution completed SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 Serial communication error SM8921 SM8931 SM8941 SM8951 IVBWR instruction error Special registers SD8500 SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 Serial communication error code SD8920 SD8930 SD8940 SD8950 IVBWR instruction error parameter number 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 100 4 8 Programming Operation of instruction execution complete flag When communication with an inverter is completed the instruction execution completed flag SM8029 turns ON and remains ON for 1 scan SM8029 indicates completion of IVDR instruction communication as shown below when MO M2 are OFF and M1 is ON If inverter communication instruction ends normally instruction execution normal end flag Page 98 turns ON simultaneously with SM8029 Operation of the instruction 1 IVWR instruction is not driven execution completed flag MO OFF
27. SM904 Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 2 SM9042 Data transfer processing SM9056 Program for indicating link errors This program is required to indicate the N N Network status Create this step for each connected slave station When a link error occurs in the station No 1 YO is set to ON When a link error occurs in the station No 2 Y1 is set to ON While the N N Network is executed Y10 remains Program for writing link devices master station slave station XO M4000 X2 ax 4H Cuooz gt RUN monitor SM400 MOV K4M100 K4M4010 MOV NM D1000 This program is required to write information from the master station to each slave station The information from XO is written to M4000 link device The information from X2 is written to M4001 link device The information from M10 is written to M4002 link device The information from M100 to M115 is written to M4010 to M4025 link devices The information from DO is written to D1000 link device n pattern O bit devices cannot be used Use the word devices instead 2 N N NETWORK 2 Programming 29 Program for reading link devices slave station master station This program is required to read information from Data transfer each slave station to the master station Monitor link E ds errors in each slave station and read them slave station No 1 SM9041 M4064 The information from M4064 link dev
28. b6 b5 b4 b5 0 1 1 1 4800 bps b6 1 0 0 0 9600 bps b7 1 0 0 1 19200 bps 1 0 1 0 38400 bps 1 0 1 1 57600 bps 1 1 0 1 115200 bps Precautions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool If FX3 Series compatible SM SD area settings have been set error code Page 121 is stored if communication error occurs by inverter communication instruction These devices store an error code when a communication error is caused by an inverter communication instruction SD8157 SD8152 R Read only Error code of first error that occurred is maintained if errors occur for multiple instructions 126 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 10 Related Devices Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Inverter communication error code is not cleared even if communication is restored to normal state Devices are cleared when power is turned OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON uction error parameter number These devices store the parameter number in which an error has occurred when IVBWR instruction error flag turns ON SD8921 SD8931 SD8941 SD8951 SD8154 SD8159 Stores the parameter number which could not be written by IVBWR instruction R Read only Error code of first error that occurred is maintained if multiple errors occur for IVBWR instruction Precauions Do not c
29. e Send amp Receive MReceive Setting The setting is required when reception is selected for the communication type Receive Wait Time Set waiting time after the waiting for reception status If 0 to 30000 unit 100ms 2 no matching packet is received within the set time error Occurs llSend Setting The setting is required when send is selected for the communication type 1 72 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 6 Protocol Setting Set the number of times the CPU module retries to send when the sending from the CPU module has not been completed within the set time of monitoring time Error occurs if sending has not been completed despite the specified number of times of sending retries Number of Send Retries Send Retry Interval Set the interval between the failure of sending from the 0 to 30000 unit 10ms CPU module and the retry when the sending from the CPU module has not been completed within the set time of monitoring time Standby Time Set standby time between when a protocol set to the 0 to 30000 unit 10ms CPU module turns to the execution status and when it actually sends the data Monitoring Time Set the waiting time between the send start and 0 to 30000 unit 100ms 2 completion An error occurs when the send is not completed within the specified time However if the send is retried the data is resent for the number of send retries O Necessity X Not necessity 1 These items can be se
30. latch setting valid information Station 1 to 7 Slave station quantity setting Turns ON when SD latch setting is set for the number of PPO x SD latch setting valid slave stations setting information BFX3 Series compatible SM8063 SM8438 SM8183 SM8184 SM8185 SM8186 SM8187 SM8188 SM8189 SM8190 SM8191 Serial communication error Turns ON when error occurs in the serial communication with M L O CH1 the SM SD compatible with FX3 Series being CH1 Station 1 to 7 Serial communication error Turns ON when error occurred in serial communication with M L O CH2 the SM SD compatible with FX3 Series being CH2 Station 1 to 7 Data communication error Turns ON when data transfer sequence error occurs in the L x O Master station master station Station 1 to 7 Data transfer sequence error Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error occurs in M L O Except station 1 O Except station 2 O Except station 3 O Except station 4 O Except station 5 O Except station 6 O Except station 7 Slave station 1 each slave station Remains ON while data transfer is being executed M L O Station 1 to 7 However data sequence errors that occurred in the local station slave station cannot be detected Data transfer sequence error Slave station 2 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 3 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 4 Data transfer sequence er
31. slave stations from the program R Read only 1 With latch settings Read write No latch settings Read only Master station The parameter setting value is reflected also to the number of slave stations setting status SD9041 SD8174 When SD90681 latch setting is set it is possible to change the setting value by a program or engineering tool and shutdown OFF ON or system reset e Slave stations After the communication is started reflects the master station setting value on each device Precauions When the latch setting is not set do not change the value with program or engineering tool 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices Stores the set refresh range in the communication settings Page 22 Use this device to check the refresh range set in the master station SD9082 SD8175 0 pattern O 1 pattern 1 2 pattern 2 R Read only Master station Reflects the parameter setting value on each device e Slave stations After the communication is started reflects the master station setting value on each device Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Stores the set number of retries in the communication settings Page 22 Stores the setting value of the number of retries SD9083 0 to 10 time R R Read only Master station Reflects the parameter setting value on each device e Slave stations After the communication is started r
32. tekeer l First data Second data APPENDIX 2 2 3 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol llReceiving Comma Space too Ex Conversion ASCII Decimal HEX Number of Send Data 1 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Receive MERERI Ex First data Conversion ASCII Decimal HEX Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Receive TEBE First data Second data No Delimiter Ex Conversion ASCII Decimal HEX Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Receive PPP EEE First data Second data APPENDIX 224 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol DO DO D1 DO D1 Data Storage Area 1234 04D2H Data Storage Area 1234 04D2H 5678 162EH Data Storage Area 1234 04D2H 5678 162EH Data examples of Check Code Shows the data examples of element check code that can be placed in a packet dure for horizontal parity The following show procedures for calculating horizontal parities using the following sample data ae eee parity Calculating range For the packet shown above Q 51H 0101 0001 XOR J 4AH 0100 1010 0001 1011 XOR 87H 0011 0111 0010 1100 XOR 4 31H 0011 0001 0001 1101 XOR C 43H 0100 0011 0101 1110 XOR 2 32H 0011 001
33. to be read from Target Memory cnet 1 74 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 6 Protocol Setting Poin tr The following data is not displayed even when reading from CPU module because it will not be written as a protocol setting data However the protocol selected from the predefined library is displayed e Manufacturer Packet name Type Version Explanation in the protocol detailed setting Element name in the packet setting Verification protocol setting data Verify the protocol setting data that is currently set with the protocol setting data that is written to the memory on the screen displayed by the following operation TZ Online gt Module Verification Window The procedure to verify the data is as follows dule Ve fication arificatio Target Selectia Target Module Selection 1 Select the CPU module of the verification target to Module Selection m which the protocol setting data is written from Module Selection Only the CPU module specified in specify Target Memory cpu Built in Memory connection destination connection of GX Works3 can be specified The data written to module is not verified because the following information is not included 2 Select the memory in which the protocol setting data is Non verified Data written from Target Memory Manufacturer Packet Name Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation Packet Setting Element Name
34. 1 packet stop specification enabled Monitoring data device specification The type of word device used as the monitor data areas with the send receive data monitoring function is stored For details refer to L Page 196 Monitor data SD9262 0 D device 1 R device 2 W device 3 SW device SD9232 SD9242 SD9252 W Write only Precaulons When a device value is changed after the send receive data monitoring has been started the change is not reflected When monitoring is started after the receive data monitoring was stopped including a stop due to a receive error the change is reflected When the storage destinations of monitor data overlap for each channel no error occurs and the values in those areas are overwritten with new values Aonitoring c start device No specification The start device number of word devices used as the monitor data areas with the send receive data monitoring function is stored For details refer to L Page 196 Monitor data SD9233 SD9243 SD9253 SD9263 0 to 32765 W W Write only Precautions When a device value is changed after the send receive data monitoring has been started the change is not reflected When monitoring is started after the receive data monitoring was stopped including a stop due to a receive error the change is reflected When the storage destinations of monitor data overlap for each channel no error occurs and the valu
35. 4 set in the RAN SD8624 SD8634 SD8644 SD8654 communication settings SD8625 SD8635 SD8645 SD8655 Terminator These devices store the contents of terminators 1 to 4 set in the RAN SD8626 SD8636 SD8646 SD8656 communication settings 156 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 9 Related Devices SD8503 SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 Serial communication This device stores the current communication mode being used operation mode R Read only R W Read Write BFX3 Series compatible SD8063 SD8438 Serial communication error Stores the error code when a serial communication error occurs R code SD8402 SD8422 Amount of remaining send These devices store the amount of remaining send data R data SD8403 SD8423 Amount of data already This device stores the amount of received data R received SD8405 SD8425 Communication parameter Stores the setting of the communication parameter display SD8414 SDB434 Receive datasum data Receive datasum These devices store the received sum check value devices store the received These devices store the received sum check value check value SD8415 C Receiving result sum These devices store the sum check value calculated using the received data SD8416 SD8436 These devices store the sum check value added to the send data SD8419 Lo NER Serial communication This device stores the current communication mode being used operation mode R Read only Details of rela
36. 485 Connector Connector Inverter Inverter a For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to the connection diagram for one inverter PU RS 485 54361 86 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring BFR E7TR When one inverter is connected 4 wire type Set the termination resistor selector Built in RS 485 port switch to 110 Q FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Twisted pair cable 0 3 mm or more Set the termination resistor selector switch to 100 Terminal arrangement Terminal block u d FR E7TR Connect them 30 0 0 mc a Inverter to the serial eaaaaem Inverter port of the PLC 92690999990 e When multiple up to 16 inverters are connected 4 wire type Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q Set the termination resistor Built in RS 485 port selector switch farthest from FX5 485 BD Twisted pair cable the inverter to 100 O FX5 485ADP 0 3 mm or more N E i N SISISISIRIRIR SISISISIRIRIR QdaAPPDPDD T D BIABBIAIBIAIB A BIAIBIAIBIAIBIA T For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to the case of when one inverter is connected For branching perform wiring as shown below 4 wire type When connecting a 100 Q termination resistor se
37. 485 port CH1 Since it is built into the CPU module there is no need to add 50 m or less equipment Communication FX5 485 BD CH2 Mounted on top of the CPU module there is no change in the 50 m or less board installation space requirements Communication FX5 485ADP CH3 CH4 Mount the communication adapter to the left of the CPU 1200 m or less adapter module 1 Assign CH3 and CH4 in the order from the adapter closest tomodule For the FX3 system configuration refer to the manual below LLIFX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition In N N Network only one channel is available to use for one CPU module 2 4 Specifications This section describes the communication specifications and performance of the N N Network function For the specifications of FX3 PLC refer to LAFX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Communication specifications The N N Network function is executed according to the communication specifications fixed shown in the table below Specification items such as baud rate cannot be changed Number of connectable units Maximum of 8 Transmission standard RS 485 standard Maximum overall distance When only FX5 485ADP is used in the configuration 1200 m or less When the built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD When configuring with FX5 485ADP or FX3U 485ADP 500 mor less and 485 BD for FX3 Series are all connected Other than the above configuration 50 m or less 50 m or less Protocol type
38. BI X5U CPU module built in RS 485 port Termination resistor selector A switch O Termination resistor selector switch A 1100 OPEN 3300 SZS 0 4x2 5 330 Q 110 Q MFX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port Termination resistor selector switch OPEN 3300 31100 Termination resistor selector switch 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 5 5 Wiring 33 Connection diagram RS 232C communication equipment llConnector pin arrangement CD DCD Receive carrier detection RD RXD Receive data SD TXD Send data ER DTR Send request SG GND Signal ground DR DSR Send enabled 7 8 9 Not used C1 OOOOO OOOO co FG Frame ground lWiring Representative wiring examples are shown in this section When pin numbers in the counterpart equipment are different wire the pins as shown below e When connected equipment is Data Terminal Equipment IEEE MUN Counterpart equipment eon in accordance with RS 232C FX5 232 BD Using CS RS CS RS Using DR ER Name FX5 232ADP Name 9 pin 25 pin Name 9 pin 25 pin 9 pin D Sub female D Sub D Sub D Sub D Sub Ls cL dues LIONEL IN NN Eme s 2 somo o Tasers 7 4 som Esse s 7 sew s 7 F9 s eem s 1s Dess 9 155 1 When the control line is not used wiring is not required for this signal For the interlink mode the co
39. D1050 D1060 to D1053 to D1063 M4448 to M4479 Bit devices 32 points for each station M4000 to M4031 D1000 to D1003 M4064 to M4095 D1010 to D1013 M4128 M4192 to M4159 to M4223 D1020 D1030 to D1023 to D1033 M4256 to M4287 D1040 to D1043 M4320 to M4351 D1050 to D1053 M4384 to M4415 D1060 to D1063 D1070 to D1073 Word devices 4 points for each station Pattern 2 M4448 to M1010 Bit devices 64 points for each station M4000 M4064 M4128 M4192 M4256 M4320 M4384 to M4063 to M4127 to M4191 to M4255 to M4319 to M4383 to M4447 D1000 D1010 D1020 to D1007 to D1017 to D1027 D1030 D1040 D1050 D1060 to D1037 to D1047 to D1057 to D1067 When creating a program do not change the information in devices used by other stations If such information is changed the D1070 to D1077 Word devices 8 points for each station other stations will not operate normally 2 N N NETWORK 2 Programming Communication test It is recommended to wire the master station and slave station perform communication settings and then execute the communication test using the following procedure to confirm proper operation Communication test program is not required during operation Communication test process 1 After configuring the communication setting of the master station and slave station and programming turn the CPU module power supply OFF ON or reset the system 2 Check if
40. Data transfer is enabled when the connected equipment supports non protocol serial communication e The overall distance is 1200 m maximum Applies only when configured by FX5 485ADP RS 232C 15 m RS 485 1200 m 50 m for connection with other than FX5 485ADP Bar code reader Printer FX5 PLC SA il Built in RS 485 port Transmission direction Bar code reader Printer 4096 points FX5 232 BD FX5 485 BD Transmission direction Bar code reader Printer hooo 4096 points ibi FX5 232ADP ER FX5 485ADP Transmission direction Bar code reader Printer 5 1 5 1 4096 points ve FX5 232ADP 4 FX5 485ADP Transmission direction Word device Bar code reader Printer 1 4096 points 128 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 1 Function Summary 5 2 Procedure before Operation The flow chart below shows the Non Protocol Communication setting procedure up until data link 1 Check communication specifications K Refer to Page 130 Specifications Communication specifications Communication applicability 2 System configuration and selection K Refer to Page 129 System Configuration 3 Wiring K Refer to Page 131 Wiring Selection of cables and connection equipment Wiring example 4 Communication settings K Refer to Page 136 Communication Settings 5 Program creation KL Refer to Page 139 Programming Detailed explanation of related devices Operation of control line
41. ESS FX5U 80MR ES FX5U 80MT ES and FX5U 80MT ESS Generic term for FX5UC 32MT D and FX5UC 32MT DSS Generic term for FX5 extension modules and FX3 function modules Generic term for I O modules FX5 extension power supply module and FX5 intelligent function module Generic term for FX3 extension power supply module and FX3 special function blocks Input modules extension cable type Output modules extension cable type Bus conversion module extension cable type and Intelligent function modules Input modules extension connector type Output modules extension connector type Input output modules Bus conversion module extension connector type and Connector conversion module extension connector type Generic term for input modules output modules Input output modules and powered input output modules Generic term for Input modules extension cable type and Input modules extension connector type Generic term for FX5 8EX ES and FX5 16EX ES Generic term for FX5 C32EX D and FX5 C32EX DS Generic term for output modules extension cable type and output modules extension connector type Generic term for FX5 8EYR ES FX5 8EYT ES FX5 8EYT ESS FX5 16EYR ES FX5 16EYT ES and FX5 16EYT ESS Generic term for FX5 C32EYT D and FX5 C32EYT DSS Generic term for FX5 C32bET D and FX5 C32ET DSS Generic term for FX5 32ER ES FX5 32ET ES and FX5 32ET ESS Generic term for FX5 extension power supply module and FX3 extension power supply modul
42. FX3 Series compatible SM SD storage area set to use special devices for either the FX3 Series CH1 or CH2 FX3 Series compatible devices corresponding to the specified channel can be used For details refer to the following K Page 36 Related Devices Set the necessity of the corresponding SD special register latch Slave station quantity setting Latch Do Not Latch SM9081 Station number settings Latch Do Not Latch SM9080 2 N N NETWORK 2 6 Communication Setting 2 Programming This section explains how to set the N N Network and how to create programs Configuration only for FX5 PLC configuration master station slave station x 7 stations In N N Network pattern 0 1 or 2 can be set according to the refresh range value The number of used devices varies depending on the pattern About FX5 PLC program and communication test refer to LLIFX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Communication setting Serial communication setting are as follows 1 Page 22 Communication Setting Protocol type N N Network mercon 8 Wewmme 9 E Execute communication test on the following settings slave station quantity setting 7 Station No 7 refresh range setting O pattern 0 2 Devices can be set individually to each station Contents of related devices The device used in the program are shown below Page 36 Related Devices Jevices for determining errors in th
43. INVERTER COMMUNICATION 106 4 8 Programming Inverter parameter read This instruction reads an inverter parameter to the PLC For information concerning inverter communication instruction expressions and execution format refer to LLJProgramming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks ENO IVRD EN s1 s2 n d1 d2 Setting data Contents range data type s1 Inverter station number ANY16 s2 Inverter parameter number ANY16 d1 Device number storing the read value 16 bit signed binary ANY 16 D avi d2 2 Bit device head number to which instruction execution status is Bit ANYBIT ARRAY output Number of elements 3 1 Specify a channel No for which communication setting is set for inverter communication 2 Make sure not to use devices being used in other control operations Page 98 BApplicable devices st Se ee ei ie eee 62 EO je jor o e r e o de a Jot jo Je e m 7 j 7 j 9e 72 e OS E j jo E ERER CI 1 T ST and C cannot be used 2 Bit specification of word device cannot be used 3 Only nibble specification of bit device can be used 4 Nibble specification of bit device cannot be used 5 Only bit specification of word device can be used The value of the parameter No s2 is read to d1 from station No s1 of inverter connected to communication channel n 4 INVERTE
44. Information gt Right click gt Add New Module After adding the expansion adapter make settings on the the screen displayed from the following operation X Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt ADP1 to ADP6 Communication adapter gt Module Parameter Window Each setting screen is the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 2 N N NETWORK 23 2 6 Communication Setting 24 g Set the following items for the serial ports that use N N Network However only one channel can be set to the N N Network Basic Settings Extended Board When using this function select FX5 485 BD Communication Protocol Type When using this function select N N Network Fixed Setting Host Station No O Master Page 17 1 to 7 Slave station Refresh Range 0 pattern O 1 pattern 1 2 pattern 2 Timeout Retry Count Setting Link Device Link Device Bit Page 17 SMISD Setting Latch Setting Latch Do Not Latch Refer to the Total Number of Local Station following FX3 Series Compatibility SM SD for Compatible Disable CH1 CH2 1 Only in the case of communication board CH2 The following settings are unnecessary fixed values Data length 7 bit Parity Even Start bit 1 bit Stop bit 1 bit Baud rate 38400 bps Header Not added Terminator Not added Control mode None Sum check code Not added Control procedure CR and LF are not added npatible SM SD When using the
45. Non conversion variable 181 219 Non protocol communication 128 Non verified reception 190 231 Number of link points llle 17 233 REVISIONS October 2014 First Edition January 2015 MAdded functions N N Network MC protocol Predefined protocol suppor MAdded or modified parts Chapter 1 2 3 Section 4 2 4 5 4 7 4 8 4 10 5 3 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 Chapter 6 Appendix 1 2 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 234 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commiss
46. OFF ON or system is reset When SD latch setting is set to latch the contents of station number settings can be changed by program or engineering tool and by turning power supply ON gt OFF or by system reset it can be operated with the station number stored in the station number settings SD8740 SD8750 SD8760 SD8770 Stores the station number of a PLC 1 With latch settings Read write No latch settings Read only Precauions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 9 Related Devices 67 68 SD8741 R Read only Precauions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool Stores the judgment time until the error when a data reception is stopped from the counterpart equipment set in the parameter when the power supply is turned OFF ON or system is reset SD8742 SD8752 SD8762 SD8772 0 to 32767 ms When O or negative value is set for the setting value the time out time is set to default value refer to the following R Read only liDefault value of the time out time Set a longer time out time to the parameter than the required time to receive one character for the baud rate being used Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool ion operation mode Stores the communication function code that the serial communication is being used SD8503 SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 MELSOFT Connection MC pr
47. OFF until communication with the inverter is finished Program in accordance with the following sequence e Add SM8029 instruction execution complete flag ON condition to the state relay transfer condition and provide interlock such that the state relay ON OFF status does not change during communication with an inverter If the state changes during communication communication may not be performed normally When resetting many state relays at once using the ZRST instruction etc make sure that the SM8920 SM8930 SM8940 or SM8950 Inverter communicating condition is OFF Reset input nd Communication port busy MO SM8920 ZRST 4095 llUsing an inverter communication instruction in a program flow An inverter communication instruction cannot be used in the following program flows State relays SO to 54095 are reset all at once Program flow that cannot use the inverter communication instruction Remarks Between CJ and P instructions Conditional jump Between FOR and NEXT instructions Repeat Between P and RET instructions Subroutine Between and IRET instructions Interrupt routine llPrecautions when using the password function for inverter Note the following if using the password function for the inverter Inverters that support password function are FREQROL A800 F700PJ F700P A700 E700 E700EX and D700 e When a communication error occurs When a communication error occurs in an inverter communication instruction the P
48. PFGuUDICSNOOUNG eT 62 Checking communication status based on LED indication 0 0 0 es 62 Checking installation and wiring 0 ccc ce ee eee RR RR RR RR 4 rs 62 Checking sequence program iue amus s Beer Ron Ib Ios e Emu due dede Ee SOS dum rdi o ace bue d doe d 63 Checking the communication setting aoaaa 63 Checking error codes RRRTRECTEERTTCRQOTURIUTT LITRO 63 3 9 Related DeVICBS sace iude bat rs rinaire e a da a Ea a E d 65 Gstolrelated dO VICBS a d ace PO NER eR ase kb e bra ut Reb A A ERA d arra E RC Bao died 65 Details of related devices nannan anaana eer 66 CHAPTER 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 69 4 1 ale nage n cGP r EPTnnTITTTPTPPPUTTT 69 4 2 Procedure before Operations 33 ririsa saddir wedges ease dos ai eR hee weed bance eee bos xod Ros 70 4 3 System ContiQuration 2s 3 Rx Cees oe EERSTE ET ORR S EOE GR dub RR acd ELK o8 dar ees 70 4 4 selle m ace eee tees a ee eee oe es Se eo ee ee eee 71 Communication SDeCIIICalloriS uu y x obppa P P EGEPPIUIXGT RESO ePOUga RE eR TIdGC LESaRE tbe sede eee 71 Applicable IH VELUOE ieee beta hwo Ae d eco cy a Xu eae ees adr eh Eadem eS d eae qudd aar de dad ee BUR 71 Inverter instruction codes and parameters lilllseeeee eere 71 Time required for inverter communication instructions llle 73 4 5 laghi m ao eee E ce Ss a ee ee ee Sa ee es ee hee ee eee ee eee 77 WVIEING OPOCCOWNGS e2i pude co
49. Parameter gt Module Information gt Right click gt Add New Module After adding the expansion adapter make settings on the the screen displayed from the following operation XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt ADP1 to ADP6 Communication adapter gt Module Parameter Each setting screen is the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 Parameter setting details Set the following items in the channel that uses MC protocol BD 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Message Pattern Pattern 1 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 Time out Period 1 to 32767 ms SM SD Setting Latch Setting Station No Latch Do Not Latch Refer to the following 1 Only in the case of communication board CH2 Advanced Settings 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 6 Communication Setting The following settings are unnecessary fixed values Start bit 1 bit Header Not added Terminator Not added Control mode Use Control procedure CR and LF no addition Set the necessity of the corresponding SD special register latch Latch Do Not Latch Station number settings SM8740 SM8750 SM8460 SM8770 3 MC Protocol Command Command list The following commands can be executed in MC protocol 0000H Reads data in 16 point units from bit devices 960 words 15360 points Reads data in 1 word unit from word devices 0081H Reads data in 1 bit unit from buffer memory of intelligent unit ASCII 3584
50. Shift 5 Generator polynomial Exclusive OR XOR Shift 6 Shift 7 Shift 8 CRC value 0100 0000 1010 0000 1110 0000 0111 0000 1010 0000 1101 0000 0110 1000 1010 0000 1100 1000 0110 0100 0011 0010 1010 0000 1001 0010 0100 1001 0010 0100 0001 0010 1001 1100 0000 0001 1001 1101 0100 1110 0000 0001 0100 1111 0010 0111 0000 0001 0010 0110 0001 0011 0000 1001 0000 0001 0000 1000 0000 0100 1000 0010 0100 0001 Packet element 2 element n 2 gt Y AS YO D pe NN Packet format Header Static data on poca Terminator Check code I I Calculating range when specifying 1 to n 1 Example 1 I I Calculating range when specifying 2 to n 1 Example 2 i I I Calculating range when specifying 2 to n 2 Example 3 i i Example 1 Calculating range when 1 and n 1 are specified as the start and the end respectively Example 2 Calculating range when 2 and n 1 are specified as the start and the end respectively Example 3 Calculating range when 2 and n 2 are specified as the start and the end respectively 2 APPENDIX 30 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Data examples of Non verified reception Shows the data examples of element non verified reception that can be placed in a packet The usage example for non verified reception is shown below MExample of format of packet from other device Data to be read Variable number of characters
51. StationNo D1010 to D1013 D1010 to D1013 D1010 to D1013 D1010 to D1013 1 M4064 to M4095 M4064 to M4095 M4064 to M4095 M4064 to M4095 StationNo D1020 to D1023 D1020 to D1023 D1020 to D1023 D1020 to D1023 2 M4128 to M4159 M4128 to M4159 M4128 to M4159 M4128 to M4159 StationNo D1030 to D1033 D1030 to D1033 D1030 to D1033 D1030 to D1033 3 M4192 to M4223 M4192 to M4223 M4192 to M4223 M4192 to M4223 In the example above devices from D1000 to D1033 34 points from the head device number of D and from M4000 to M4223 224 points from the head device number of M are occupied Other devices can be used as general control devices Link devices for unconnected slave stations can be used as general control devices however it is recommended to save the unoccupied link devices for the slave stations to be used in the future ex Refresh range pattern 2 Link device head number station 0 D200 M2000 station 2 D500 M3000 Master station FX5 PLC slave station FX5 PLC x 1 FX3 PLC x 2 Master station Station No D200 to D207 DO to D7 D500 to D507 DO to D7 0 M2000 to M2063 M1000 to M1063 M3000 to M3063 M1000 to M1063 Slave stations Station No D210 to D217 D10 to D17 D510 to D517 D10 to D17 1 M2064 to M2127 M1064 to M1127 M3064 to M3127 M1064 to M1127 StationNo D220 to D227 D20 to D27 D520 to D527 D20 to D27 2 M2128 to M2191 M1128 to M1191 M3128 to M3191 M1128 to M1191 Station No D230 to D237 D30 to D37 D530 to D537 D30 to D37 3 M
52. a Precautions for program creation Using multiple RS2 instructions The RS2 instructions can be used as many times as necessary in a program but make sure that only one RS2 instruction is driven in each serial port at a time For switching of the RS2 instruction used make sure the OFF time is longer than one scan time Communication protocol setting If protocol of communication settings Page 136 for the channel to be used is not set to Non protocol Communication RS2 instructions cannot be used Using RS2 instruction together with another instruction RS2 instruction cannot be used in the same serial port which is being used for any other communication such as inverter communication L Page 212 Combined Use of Serial Communication Control line interlink mode In the interlink mode set the amount of received data n to 31 or more If itis set to 30 or less the control line ER DTR is set to OFF as soon as the PLC receives data Using RS 485 half duplex bi directional communication Be sure to check the following e Leave 100 us or more time between send completed start receive Do not turn ON the sending request flag while receiving e Since data cannot be received while sending do not send data from the counterpart equipment to the PLC When using header or terminator set before driving the RS2 instruction Accordingly do not change the setting while the RS2 instruction is driven 5 NON PROTOC
53. aan eee Rc 191 Predefined protocol support instruction llli ran 191 Program example nananana aaa 198 6 9 Troubleshooting nssasansannnnnnn nanan nannan annann 200 Checking communication status based on LED display 0 0 0 0c a 200 Checking Installaon m m 200 Checking sequence program 0 eee 200 Checking the communication settings cece ee eee I sn 200 Checking absence presence of Errors 6 ee ee eee eee 200 6 10 Related Devices 0 0 ccc eee 204 Listof related BeVIGBS ues xus eee id iura Sh Saw bs Blas ds SudI Red bui oes ea ek be 3s bee 204 Details of related devices 1 eee eee eee eens 205 APPENDIX 212 Appendix 1 Combined Use of Serial Communication 0 0000 cee ees 212 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 213 Operation image of each communication type 2 0 ee eee eee ees 213 Vernthcation oper dliobl ce 254 abn ou seeks 52668 ee be eaten eee sere oa oded oe eS Ghee eee coe absences 216 Data examples or Length 2 26 2 24 ace eodeni Ge Rr eek So e Bar ed bw ee Rh oe be ee ee d 217 Data examples of Non conversion Variable 0 0 00 cc ee eee eens 219 Data examples of Conversion Variable 1 0 0 0 aa aaa aaa ee eee eee eens 220 Data examples of Check Code 1 ne ee eee ee eee eens 225 Data examples of Non verified reception 0 0 00 ee ee ee eee ee
54. an error occurs llReceiving Fixed point ex Conversion ASCII Decimal HEX Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Number of Decimals 1 First data 123 4 067 8 Second data APPENDIX 222 Receive pP Di Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 5678 162EH Data Storage Area DO 1234 04D2H Value Value Variable Point ex Conversion ASCII Decimal HEX Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 First data 123 4 0 6 8 Second data Receive Data Storage Area o oom oi 00 o room o ooon Value Decimal point position area Value Decimal point position area Operation of Delimiter llSending Comma Space too Ex Conversion HEX ASCII Decimal Number of Send Data 1 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Data Storage Area DO 1234 04D2H Ex Conversion HEX ASCII Decimal Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Data Storage Area DO 1234 04D2H D1 5678 162EH No Delimiter E Conversion HEXASCII Decimal Number of Send Data 2 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 4 Data Storage Area DO 1234 04D2H D1 5678 162EH Send Send Send SERRE First data Gane aa Xu 9 e First data Second data
55. cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Insulating sleeve Contact area Insulating sleeve Contact area m crimp area p crimp area 8 mm 2 to 2 5 mm 2 6 mm er 0 07 to 0 09 10 5 to 12 mm 0 1 o d4Amm 0 41 to 0 47 0 55 lt Reference gt FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 6WH CRIMPFOX 6 FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX 6T F FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Tool For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver with straight tip that is not widened toward the end as shown below With straight tip B Precautions If the diameter of the screwdriver tip is too small the required tightening torque cannot be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the 0a mm je aoe LL 0 01 0 09 previous page use the following screwdriver or its equivalent grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 lt Reference gt Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 2 N N NETWORK 2 5 Wiring Termination resistor setting Make sure to provide a termination resistor at both ends of the wire The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have a built in termination resistor Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q BI X5U CPU module built in RS 485 port MF X5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port j HN RN
56. change the value with program or engineering tool 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 2 6 10 Related Devices 07 llPredefined protocol setting data error information Element No When a protocol setting data error was detected the number of the element where the error has occurred is stored Starting from the smallest element number elements are checked in order and the number of the element where the error has first been detected is stored This setting is valid when 0 is set in Setting type SD9121 D9123 1 to 32 Element No 65535 Not identifiable 1 Damaged protocol setting data failures of the memory built in the CPU module or the SD memory card can be a factor that causes a setting value to be not identifiable R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Eo sd predefined protocols The number of registered protocol setting data is stored SD9124 E to 64 R R Read only 1 When a protocol setting data error has occurred O is stored Do not change the value with program or engineering tool ocol Protocol registration TOederi ned pre f 1 W ol IB a The ON OFF state of the bit corresponding to a protocol number indicates whether the protocol setting data has been registered or not SD9132 A bit corresponding to each protocol number is turned R on or off 1 to 16 bO to b15 SD9133 A bit cor
57. data Length Judged as matched when the number of digits is the same Non conversion variable Conversion variable Check code Judged as matched when the result calculated based on the settings horizontal parity sum check CRC 16 is the same Non verified reception Judged as matched when the number of digits is the same Operation performed when multiple receive packets are registered When data is received the verification operation is performed in order starting from the receive packet that was first registered The receive processing is completed when the receive packets and receive data match Receive packet Packet No 1 Packet No 2 Packet No 3 eee Packet No 16 expected packet Verification mismatch Verification match Verification mismatch Received data J P Receiving completed 2 1 6 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Operation performed for verification mismatch When receive data does not match with all receive packets the receive data is discarded Note that discarding receive data A does not cause an error Receive packet Packet No 1 Packet No 2 Packet No 3 eee Packet No 16 expected packet Verification Verification Verification Verification mismatch mismatch mismatch mismatch Received data _ i MEM p BEEN s i discard Data examples of Length Shows the data examples of element length that can be placed in a packet ae Data exa
58. existing system adopt the wiring method used in the existing system 2 Echo is generated when the FX 485PC IF is used in one pair wiring Take proper countermeasures in the computer so that the echo can be ignored Cable Select cables using the procedure described below ible RS 485 Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting RS 485 communication equipment The specifications of the cables used in wiring are shown MRS 485 cable specifications Cable type Shielded cable Number of pairs 2p 3p Conductor resistance 20 C 88 0 Q km or less Insulation resistance 10000 MQ km or more Voltage resistance 500 V DC 1minute Electrostatic capacitance 1 kHz 60 nF km or less as an average Characteristic impedance 100 kHz 1104 10 Q llCable structural drawing reference Example of three pair cable structural drawing x The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port One wire 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 22 to 0 25 N m AWG24 to 20 AWG24 to 20 mowes 2mW WGM FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port 0 3 to 0 5 mm 0 3 to 0 5 mm FX5 485 BD AWG22 to 20 AWG22 to 20 Precaulons Do not tighten terminal screws exceeding the specified torque range Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 5 Wiring 53 54 MWire end treatment With regard to the cable end treatment use a stranded
59. gt Storage Area Specification Send Data Storage Area 1 Word Specifiable Device Symbol X Y M L B D W R ones Element Name Set the name of the element Fixed Length Variable Fixed Length Sends and receives the data whose length is fixed Length Variable Length Specifies the data length at the time of the protocol execution and sends data sending When Receives data whose data length is variable receiving Data Length Maximum Set the length of data to be transmitted and received For the variable length data set the maximum data length that can be Data Length specified to the data length storage area The range is 1 to 2048 Unit of Stored Data Lower Byte Upper Byte When Sends each one word 2 bytes data in the data storage area in the order of the lower sending byte to the upper byte When Stores the received data to the data storage area in the order of the lower byte to the receiving upper byte Lower Bytes Only Sends only lower byte of data in the data storage area sending When Stores the received data in the only lower byte of the data storage area receiving Byte Swap Disable Lower Upper When When Enable is selected sends data swapping the upper byte and lower byte by Enable Upper Lower sending word 2 bytes When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes sends the upper byte at transmission of the last byte When U
60. identifiable Do not change the value with program or engineering tool llPredefined protocol setting data error information Setting type When a protocol setting data error was detected the setting type number of the protocol where the error has occurred is stored This setting is valid when 1 to 64 is set in protocol number SD9120 SD9121 0 Packet setting or element setting 1 Configuring detailed setting of protocols 65535 Not identifiable R Read only 1 Damaged protocol setting data failures of the memory built in the CPU module or the SD memory card can be a factor that causes a setting value to be not identifiable Do not change the value with program or engineering tool llPredefined protocol setting data error information Packet No When a protocol setting data error was detected the number of the packet where the error has occurred is stored Starting from the smallest number of the send packets and receive packets expected packets packets are checked in order and the packet number of the packet where the error has first been detected is stored This setting is valid when 0 is set in setting type SD9121 SD9122 0 Send packet 1 Receive packet 65535 Not identifiable R Read only 1 Damaged protocol setting data failures of the memory built in the CPU module or the SD memory card can be a factor that causes a setting value to be not identifiable Precauions Do not
61. in 1 bit unit to MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of ASCII 3584 points intelligent unit BIN 3584 points 0082H Writes data in 1 word 16 bits unit to MC protocol compatible devices or buffer 960 words 15360 points memory of intelligent unit Random reading 0403H 0000H Reads a word device in 1 word unit or 2 word unit by randomly specifying the device 192 points Device Read number Random 0080H Reads data in 1 word 16 bit unit from MC protocol compatible devices or buffer 192 points memory of intelligent unit 0082H Reads data in 1 word 16 bit unit from MC protocol compatible devices or buffer 192 points memory of intelligent unit 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 MC Protocol Command 60 the device number double word access points x14 lt 1920 0081H Writes data in 1 bit unit to MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of 188 points intelligent unit Indirectly specifies a buffer memory in the index register 0080H Writes data in 1 word 16 bits or 2 word unit to MC protocol compatible devices or Number of word access buffer memory of intelligent unit points x12 number of double word access points x14 1920 0083H Writes data in 1 bit unit to MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of 188 points intelligent unit 0082H Random writing 1402H 0001H Writes data in 1 bit unit to a bit device by randomly specifying the device number 188 points Device Vite 0000H Writes data in 1
62. in the targeted unit for performing data reading writing etc In 3C 4C frame in the following Device Code specify a device of the access point Internal user Input X X Bevkee Output Y Y Internal relay M M Latch relay L L Annunciator F F Edge relay V V Link relay B B Step relay S S Bit Contact Bit TS TS Coil TC TC it 51H 5100H Contact B LTS Coil LTC 50H 5000H Present value Double LTN 52H 5200H word Retentive timer Bit We e l case Present value Double LSTN 5AH 5A00H word Bit CS CS C4H C400H 9CH 9C00H 9DH 9D00H 90H 9000H 92H 9200H 93H 9300H 94H 9400H AOH A000H 98H 9800H Specify within the range of device numbers that the unit at the access point 6 i O O Hexadecimal OL S CX Oe Data register Word D D A8H A800H Link register ul we W B4H B400H Timer C1H C100H Decimal O COH C000H O Present value TN TN C2H C200H O Long Timer Decimal O O O Decimal m CC CC C3H C300H Long counter Bit LCS 55H 5500H EE t Decimal Decimal OLOJOJOIO O 54H 5400H Present value Double LCN word l 56H 5600H Link special relay SB SB A1H A100H O Link special register SW SW B5H B500H O O O System Special relay Bit SM SM 91H 9100H Specify within the device Special Register Word SD SD A9H
63. occurred nformation to judge whether the predefined protocol can be executed or not LI Whether the predefined protocol can be executed or not can be judged with the value set in predefined protocol ready SD9102 e SD9102 0 The protocol cannot be executed because the protocol setting has an error e D9102 1 The protocol can be executed because the protocol setting is correct The judgment timing is as follows Predefined protocol setting Power is turned OFF2ON Start writing System reset Writing process Check process Operation of the module that uses the protocol setting Written communication protocol setting Communication protocol Predefined protocol setting reflected to the module setting new 1 normal 0 abnormal Check of the existing protocol setting Check result Communication protocol ready SD9102 1 normal 0 abnormal 1 When protocol setting is not written in it is O error 1 94 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 8 Programming Protocol Cancel lis E Executing protocol can be canceled by the cancel request 1 is set for the protocol cancel setting value Page 209 Protocol cancel specification Then canceled protocol ends abnormally When two or more protocols are executed consecutively executing protocol ends and following protocols are not executed Drive S P CPRTCL instruction Completion device d I Completion status indication device d
64. or engineering tool pecification The protocol in execution can be cancelled with a value to be stored in this area For details refer to k Page 195 SD9169 SD9189 SD9209 SD9229 0 Normally operation do not cancel 1 Cancel request 2 Cancel operation completed R W Read Write 2 data monitoring function setting The send receive data monitoring function can be stopped or started by storing a value in hexadecimal After monitoring has been started the status of the function is stored For details refer to L Page 195 Send receive data monitoring function SD9230 SD9240 SD9250 SD9260 0000H Monitor stop R W 0001H Monitor start 0002H Monitoring set by system 1002H Monitor stop set by system 100FH Monitor setting error set by system R W Read Write 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 2 6 10 Related Devices 09 ta monitoring function option setting The data area full stop specification and 1 packet stop specification of the send receive data monitoring function can be enabled or disabled by storing a value For details refer to L gt Page 195 Send receive data monitoring function SD9231 W Write only The following table lists the setting contents of the send receive data monitoring function option setting bO Data area full stop specification Monitor continued data is Monitor stop overwritten b1 Packet stop specification 1 packet stop specification disabled
65. protocol setting from a protocol setting window displayed by the following operation in GX Works3 XO loolePredefined Protocol Support Function CPU Serial New protocol support j when change the connection destination setting in GX Works3 after starting the p edefined nrotocol sunnort fi nction Pleas i File Edit Online Tool Debugging Support Function Window ED BS RA LES ER Editable Protocol Protocol Line Send Packet Line Receive Packet Line Protocol in Predefined Protocol Library Protocol Line C Send Packet Line Receive Packet Line Protocols 2 64 Packets 6 128 Packet Data Area Usage 2 096 Module for Debugging Kana characters C SC The fields in the protocol setting window are as follows Protocol No Displays the protocol number to be used for a predefined protocol dedicated instruction Manufacturer Displays the manufacturer s name of the device to which a protocol to be set is applied Model Displays the model name of the device to which a protocol to be set is applied Protocol Name Displays the name of the protocol to be set Communication Type Displays the communication type of the protocol to be set e Send Only Send one send packet once Receive Only Receive a packet if it matches any of up to 16 registered receive packets e Send amp Receive Send one send packet and receives a packet if it matche
66. receive data from equipment where the amount of send data varies without the terminators Receive data is suspended Receiving K oaa D Timeout Time out time ON Receiving completed Set to OFF in program The time out check is judged in END processing based on a 1 ms free counter set when the data receiving starts and the time out flag is turned ON A lag of maximum 1 scan time occurs due to processing in the END processing Precautions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool When a serial communication error occurs these devices store the corresponding error codes K Page 155 SD8500 R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Serial communication error code is not cleared even after communication is restored to normal state They are cleared by turning the PLC power OFF ON RUN gt STOP resetting the system or by SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON The communication parameters set in the communication settings are stored when the power is turned OFF ON or the system is reset 1 gt Page 136 Communication Settings SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Stores the setting of the communication parameter R Read only The descriptions of the communication parameters are as follows b1 Parity bit b2 b1 b2 0 0 Not provided 0 1 Odd 1 1 Even 160 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 9 Rela
67. receive data from equipment where the amount of send data varies without the terminators When the control line is set to interlink mode When the interlink mode is set in the communication parameters the following sequence is adopted from the start of receiving to completion 1 When the amount of data already received becomes preset amount of received data 30 the control line ER DTR turns OFF When the control line ER DTR turns OFF the external equipment should suspend data sending After the control line ER DTR turns OFF the PLC can receive up to 30 characters bytes 2 When the external equipment suspends data sending the PLC sets the time out check flag and receiving complete flag to ON after the preset time out time setting Move the received data in a sequence program and then set the receiving complete flag and time out check flag to OFF 3 When the receiving complete flag is set to OFF the control line ER DTR turns ON When the control line ER DTR turns ON restart data sending from the external equipment 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until data receiving is completed llPrecautions for receiving When receiving data please take care about the following While the receiving completed flag is ON the PLC cannot receive the next set of receive data When the receiving completed flag is set to OFF the PLC waits to receive e f the RS2 instruction is driven while the amount of received data n2 is 0 the receivin
68. refer to L 1 1the A800 series inverter manual 342 N001 Communication EEPROM write 0 or 1 0 Write to EEPROM and RAM selection 1 Write to RAM only 338 D010 Communication operation command 0 or 1 0 PLC rights 1 Outside 339 D011 Communication speed command rights O or 1 0 PLC 1 Outside 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 91 4 6 Inverter Communication Settings 92 FREQROL F700P A700 series b Connection destination Built in RS 485 terminal nication setting essential items The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases RS 485 communication station 0 to 31 Up to 16 inverters can be connected RS 485 communication speed 48 4800 bps 9600 bps 192 19200 bps 384 38400 bps Data length 7 bits Stop bit 1 bit Pr 333 RS 485 communication stop bit length Pr 334 RS 485 communication parity check selection Pr 337 RS 485 communication waiting time 9999 Set in communication data setting Pr 341 RS 485 communication CR LF selection Pr 79 Operation mode selection oe External operation mode is selected when power is turned ON Pr 549 Protocol selection ao o Mitsubishi inverter computer link protocol Pr 340 Communication startup mode 1 Network operation mode selection Even CR Provided LF Not provided t operation operation Parameters that must be adjusted for test operation and operation are as follows Pr 335 RS 485 communication number of 9999 Set the value shown on
69. serial M L O code CH3 communication of CH3 Station 1 to 7 SD8522 Serial communication Stores the set communication parameter in the PLC of CH3 M L O settings CH3 Station 1 to 7 SD8523 Serial communication Stores the communication function that serial communication M L O operation mode CH3 of CH3 being used Station 1 to 7 SD8530 Serial communication error Stores the error code when an error occurs in the serial M L O code CH4 communication of CH4 Station 1 to 7 SD8532 Serial communication Stores the set communication parameter in the PLC of CH4 M L O settings CH4 Station 1 to 7 SD8533 Serial communication Stores the communication function that serial communication M L O operation mode CH4 of CH4 being used Station 1 to 7 SD9043 Present link scan time Current value of the network cycle time M L O Station 1 to 7 SD9044 Maximum link scan time Maximum value of the network cycle time M L O Station 1 to 7 SD9045 Number of communication Number of data transfer sequence errors occurred in the L x O error at master station master station Station 1 to 7 SD9046 Number of communication error at slave station 1 Number of data transfer sequence errors occurred in other O slave station Except station 1 However data sequence errors that occurred in the local O station slave station cannot be detected SD9047 Number of communication error at slave station 2 Except station 2 SD9048 Number of commun
70. started data is stored in order of receive data send data and receive error starting from the monitor data area The storage timing of the data is as follows Receive data When data receiving e Send data When data sending Receive error data When sending error detection The following shows the operations of when the size of the monitored data exceeds the size of the monitor data area When monitoring continued bit 0 OFF is set for data area full stop specification The old data is overwritten with the new data and the monitoring continues e When monitoring stop bit 0 ON is set for data area full stop specification Monitoring stops and monitoring stop 1002H is written to send receive data monitoring function settings Monitor stop Monitoring is stopped by one of the following methods Monitoring is stopped when OOOOH is set for send receive data monitoring function setting When monitoring stop bit 0 ON is set for Data area full stop specification Monitoring is stopped when the data is stored for the size of the monitor data area At this time monitoring stop 1002H is written for send receive data monitoring function setting When 1 packet stop specified bit 1 ON is set for 1 packet stop specification Monitoring is stopped when the sending of one packet send data or the receiving of one packet receive data is completed If the size of one packet exceeds the size of the monitor data area monitoring is stopped wh
71. station cannot be detected Except station 2 SD8206 Number of communication O error at slave station 3 Except station 3 SD8207 Number of communication O error at slave station 4 Except station 4 SD8208 Number of communication O error at slave station 5 Except station 5 SD8209 Number of communication O error at slave station 6 Except station 6 SD8210 Number of communication O error at slave station 7 Except station 7 SD8211 Code of communication error Stores the error code for the master station L x O at master station Station 1 to 7 SD8212 Data transmission error code Stores the data transfer error code occurred in other slave M L O slave station 1 station Except station 1 SD8213 Data tranemissiom amorcoda OWENEL data sequence errors that occurred in the local O slave station 2 station slave station cannot be detected Except station 2 SD8214 Data transmission error code O slave station 3 Except station 3 SD8215 Data transmission error code O slave station 4 Except station 4 SD8216 Data transmission error code O slave station 5 Except station 5 SD8217 Data transmission error code O slave station 6 Except station 6 SD8218 Data transmission error code O slave station 7 Except station 7 R Read only M Master station station number 0 L Slave station station number 1 to 7 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices Details of related devices The devices described below are used in N N Netwo
72. straight tip that is not widened toward the end as shown below B Precautions With straight tip If the diameter of the screwdriver tip is too small the required tightening torque cannot be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the CeO P so RIAL 0 01 0 09 previous page use the following screwdriver or its equivalent grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 Reference Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x 2 5 Connection devices RJ45 connector and distributor Prepare the following devices if necessary RJ45 connector 5 554720 3 Tyco Electronics Japan Ltd Distributor BMJ 8 HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO LTD BMJ 8 28N no internal connection for pins 2 and 8 Do not use plug with termination resistor 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring Termination resistor setting Set or connect termination resistor of the inverter farthest from the FX5 PLC For details on connection refer to K Page 84 Connection diagram At the FX5 PLC The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have a built in termination resistor Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q BI X5U CPU module built in RS 485 port HN RN Termination qa switch Termination resistor selector switch 4 A gt 1100 OPEN 3300 At the Inverter MFX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port 43300 Termination resistor selector switch OPEN
73. the number is variable For Variable number of digits delimiters are required Number of Send Data Set the number of data to be transmitted and received For Variable Number of Data set the maximum number of data that can be specified to the data quantity storage area The range is 1 to 256 Number of Send Digits 1 to 10 Set the number of digits per one transmitted and received data of Data When the number of send digits of data is less than the specified number of digits of data upper digits are filled with blank padded characters Variable Number of Digits When sending Sends only the data portion converted to an ASCII string in variable length When receiving Receives only an ASCII string of the data portion in variable length When the number of send data maximum data length is set to 2 or greater blank padded characters are required 1 94 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting Blank padded Character 0 Select a character used to fill upper digits when the number of digits of data is not Variable at Send Space Number of Digits and the number of digits of transmitted received data is less than the specified number of send digits of data Conversion Unit Converts one word as one data in the data storage area Double word Converts two words as one data in the data storage area Sign Unsigned Select whether to add signs to date in the data storage area Signed This item can be set when Co
74. to Added in the communication settings always select Added for the terminator Sendingsum When the sum check code is set to Added in the communication settings Page 136 the sum check is executed for the send data These devices store the sum calculated by the CPU module from the send data SD8565 SD8575 SD8585 SD8595 SD8415 SD8435 These devices store the sum check value added to the send data R Read only 162 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 9 Related Devices Precautions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool When the sum check code is set to Added in the communication settings always select Added for the terminator SD8621 R W Read Write Do not change the time out time setting while the RS2 instruction is being driven To change the value do so before the RS2 instruction is driven while off The change is enabled when the RS2 instruction is driven These devices store the value for the processing mode set in the communication settings Page 136 SD8622 SD8632 SD8642 SD8652 0 16 bit processing mode 1 8 bit processing mode R W Read Write Do not change the 8 bit processing mode while the RS2 instruction is being driven To change the value do so before the RS2 instruction is driven while off The change is enabled when the RS2 instruction is drive They are cleared by turning the PLC power OFF ON RUN gt STOP or by resetting the sys
75. to select second parameters In IVRD IVWR and IVBWR instructions when a value shown in the tables below is set in s2 s3 in IVBWR instruction the extension parameter and second parameter are automatically overwritten and parameter values are either read or written For details concerning inverter parameters refer to LAthe manual for each particular inverter 0 series Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers Pr 125 Pr 126 C2 to C19 and C38 to C41 C12 Bias frequency speed for terminal No 1 917 C13 Bias speed for terminal No 1 1917 C14 Gain frequency speed for terminal No 1 918 C15 Gain speed for terminal No 1 1918 C16 Bias command torque for terminal No 1 919 C17 Bias torque for terminal No 1 1919 C18 Gain command torque for terminal No 1 920 C19 Gain torque for terminal No 1 1920 C8 Current output bias signal 930 C9 Current output bias current 1930 C10 Current output gain signal 931 C11 Current output gain current 1931 C38 Bias command torque for terminal No 4 932 C39 Bias torque for terminal No 4 1932 C40 Gain command torque for terminal No 4 933 C41 Gain torque for terminal No 4 1933 C42 PID display bias coefficient 934 C43 PID display bias analog value 1934 C44 PID display gain coefficient 935 C45 PID display gain analog value 1935 L F700P series Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers Pr 125 Pr 126 C2 to C7 C2 Terminal 2 freque
76. to the specified channel can be used For details refer to the following KL Page 123 Related Devices 4 8 Programming This section explains how to create programs which change parameters of inverters and give operation commands to inverters A program example is shown for each inverter communication instruction For details on related devices refer to Page 123 Related Devices Common items in inverter communication instructions Inverter communication types The PLC and inverter communicate using inverter communication instructions There are six types of inverter communication instructions that differ according to data communication direction and parameter writing reading direction as follows Instruction Function Controddirection Reference section IVBWR Writes multiple parameters to an PLClInverter Page 111 inverter IVMC Multiple inverter commands PLColnverter Page 114 Function and operation llCommunication start timing At the rising edge OFF ON of the drive contact of the inverter communication instruction the PLC starts communication with an inverter Even if the drive contact turns OFF during communication with an inverter the PLC executes communication until the last instruction When the drive contact is always ON the PLC executes communication repeatedly 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 8 Programming 97 llCommunication execution state output device The inverter communication instruction o
77. tr When variables are included in receive packet elements variable parts are not verified When more than one receive packet is specified received data is verified with the receive packet information of the first registered packet in the order of registration The receive processing is performed once received data match one of the receive packet number and further verification is not performed The receive packet number which is matched as the result of the verification is stored in the control data of the S P CPRTCL instruction Verification operation The following shows the verification operations of receive packets expected packets of when receive is included in the selected communication type Receive data and receive packets are compared in the receive processing and the processing is completed when the verification result is matched Note that the data section of a packet is handled as receive data in the same way as it is handled at send operation Receive packet expected packet Verification match Received data b Receiving completed Verification standards In the verification of receive packets each element is judged if it is matched or not The standard to judge each element as matched depends on each element type The following table lists verification standards for each element type Element type Verification standards Header Judged as matched when the data contents are the same Terminator Static
78. transmitted n Data is being transmitted but not being received o Off Data is neither being transmitted nor being received If signals are being sent and received normally for inverter communication both LEDs flash brightly If they do not flash check the wiring and the communication settings 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 11 4 9 Troubleshooting 9 Checking installation Connection status The communication cannot be operated if the PLC and the communication board communication adapter are not connected correctly For the connection procedure refer to the following LAFX5U User s manual Hardware LAFX5UC User s manual Hardware Wiring Verify that all communication equipment is correctly wired lt Page 77 Wiring Checking sequence program A serial port using any other communication such as RS2 instruction cannot use an inverter communication instruction L Page 212 Combined Use of Serial Communication Checking the communication settings CPU module communication settings Verify that the protocol type is Inverter Communication If the communication settings are not Inverter Communication communication will not function correctly 1 gt Page 95 PLC Communication settings After changing communication settings make sure to turn the PLC power from OFF gt ON or reset the system Checking inverter operation status 1 When the operation mode of an inverter is not changed to computer link operatio
79. 0 0110 1100 XOR 4 34H 0011 0100 0101 1000 XOR N 4EH 0100 1110 0001 0110 XOR ETX 03H 0000 0011 0001 0101 Binary 1 5 Hexadecimal llData Flow Forward Direction Data Length 1 No complement calculation is designated Reference Hexadecimal 15H Decimal 21 ASCII hexadecimal 5 35H 15 31H 35H 015 30H 31H 35H 0015 30H 30H 31H 35H ASCII decimal 1 31H 21 32H 31H 021 30H 32H 31H 0021 30H 30H 32H 31H HEX 0015H 000015H 00000015H One s complement is designated One s complement for 0000 0015H FFFF FFEAH When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FFEAH decimal 65514 ASCII hexadecimal A 41H EA 45H 41H FEA 46H451H 41H FFEA 846H 46H 45H 41H ASCII decimal 4 34H 14 31H 34H 514 35H 31H 34H 5514 35H 35H 31H 34H HEX FFEAH FFFFEAH FFFFFFEAH Two s complement is designated Two s complement for 0000 0015H FFFF FFEBH When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FFEBH decimal 65515 ASCII hexadecimal B 42H EB 45H 42H FEB 46H 45H 42H FFEB 46H 46H 45H 42H ASCII decimal 5 35H 15 31H 35H 515 35H 31H 35H 5515 35H 35H 31H 35H HEX FFEBH FFFFEBH FFFFFFEBH APPENDIX 2 2 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 5 llData Flow Reverse Direction No complement calculation is designa
80. 00 MOV K1X0 Specify device numbers for the connected slave D1010 Steps for reading information from a slave station slave station master station Transfer the contents of XO to X3 in this slave stations D1010 in this example station to a link device The link device varies depending on the station number The table below shows the link devices to be used Slave station No Link device D1010 D1020 D1030 D1040 D1050 D1060 D1070 Jijoj oOc 1 c5 n5 MOV D1000 K1YO Step for writing information from the master station master station slave station The contents of XO to X3 in the master station are transferred to YO to Y3 in this slave station Steps for reading information from another slave station another slave stations this slave station d D1030 K1Y14 By using link devices read information from another slave stations The table below shows the link devices to be used Slave station No Output Y Y4 to Y7 Y10 to Y13 Y14 to Y17 Y20 to Y23 Y24 to Y27 Y30 to Y33 Y34 to Y37 Specify link device numbers for other slave stations This slave station is D1010 in this example K1Y34 m NIOlO R WO sNM gt d m Z U 28 2 N N NETWORK 2 Programming Create the master station program Create programs for the master station Arbitrarily create programs for reading and writing link devices Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 1
81. 1 The data is sent Sending request SET SM8561 e When sending is completed the sending request SM8561 is automatically reset Do not reset it in the program 7 Program example for BMOV D200 D500 K15 i moving received data e When the PLC receives data from the counterpart equipment the receiving completed flag SM8562 turns ON When SM8562 turns ON move the received data stored in D200 to another device In the example above the data received in 16bit processing mode stored data from D200 onwards is moved to the 15 data register points from D500 onwards Receiving completed RST SM8562 e After moving the received data reset the receiving completed flag SM8562 While SM8562 is ON the PLC cannot receive the next set of receive data 1 For handling of send and receive data refer to Page 143 Send receive data and amount of data 2 For the operation when sending data refer to L Page 146 Operation during data send 3 For the operation when receiving data refer to k Page 147 Operation during data receive Receiving complete SM8562 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 142 5 Programming Send receive data and amount of data RS2 instruction can handle sent and received data in two modes 16 bit mode and 8 bit mode The processing mode is set in the communication settings and when the RS2 instruction is drive the mode is switched to the set mode The handling of data is as follows 16 bit
82. 1 CR LF Not Added Communication adapter CH3 CH4 When an expansion adapter is used add expansion adapter to Module Information 4 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt Right click gt Add New Module After adding the expansion adapter make settings on the screen displayed from the following operation XXO Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt ADP1 to ADP6 Communication adapter gt Module Parameter Window Each setting screen is the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 6 Communication Settings 137 Parameter setting details E Set the following items for the serial ports that use non protocol communication Basic Settings Extended Board When using this function select FX5 232 BD or FX5 485 BD Communication Protocol Type When using this function select Non protocol Communication Data Length 7bit 8bit Parity Bit None Odd Even Stop Bit 1 bit 2bit Baud Rate 300bps 600bps 1200bps 2400bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Header Setting Value 00000000 to FFFFFFFF You can enter a two digit four headers Terminator Setting Value 00000000 to FFFFFFFF You can enter a two digit four terminators Control Mode RS 232 No Control Line Control Line Normal Mode Control Line Page 150 Interlink Mode Control Line Modem Mode Control Mode RS 485 Full Duplex Bi directional Comm
83. 1 Dodo o M 1 The protocol in execution is l I I I Jae acus a eae canceled Execution protocol No O XIX XX aa Bee The subsequent protocols are not executed Protocol cancel CN ne specification Normally operation 2 Cancel operation completed The operation differs as follows depending on the protocol communication in execution and the timing of the cancel request protocol execution status Send Executed protocols start Before data transmission start The packet is not sent Waiting for transmission Data transmission start Before send completed Sending The packet is not suspended let the send complete Receive Send completed Before data reception start Waiting for data The packet is not received reception After data reception start Receiving The packet is suspended and the packet is discarded f a cancel request is issued while no protocol is being executed the CPU module completes the cancel request without performing any processing The CPU module periodically checks for a cancel request For this reason it may take time until cancel processing is performed after a cancel request is issued nd receive data monitoring function With the send receive data monitoring function send receive data in the communication with a counterpart device can be monitored Set the following devices to execute monitoring or specify the storage destination data device for the send receive
84. 15 13 4 17 parameter is necessary z 0 Je e Je b b bH 1 7 I 1 Indicates the number of sent received characters required to write 1 parameter The IVBWR instruction executes parameter writing repeatedly for the number of times of communication s2 2 There is no response from the inverter because resetting is not complete The PLC waits for 2 2 s until reset of the inverter is completed and then completes execution of the inverter communication instruction lllData check time of inverters Make sure to refer to the manual of the inverter used and confirm the data check time corresponding to the communication command used Various monitors operation command set frequency RAM 12 ms Parameters read write set frequency EEPROM 30 ms Parameter all clear all clear 5s Reset instruction No response The PLC waits for 2 2 s until reset of the inverter is completed and then completes execution of the inverter communication instruction The IVWR IVRD and IVBWR instructions automatically change expansion parameters and the 2nd parameter The data check time for the last 2nd or 3rd send receive in the IVWR and IVRD instructions and the data check time for the last send receive of each parameter writing in the IVBWR instruction corresponds to parameter reading writing 30 ms The data check time for sending and receiving other than the above such as expansion parameter change and 2nd parameter change corresponds to various monitor
85. 20 Data examples of Conversion Variable Element Name Read Data Conversion HEX gt ASCI Decimal gt Fixed Number of Data Variable Number of Data Variable Number of Data v Number of Send 30 5etting Range 1 to 256 Number of Send Digits of Data l m Blank padded Character at Send 0 Conversion Unit Word Sign Signed m Sign Character None Number of Decimals No Decimal Point Delimiter No Delimiter Data Storage Area Specification Data Count Storage Area DO 1 Word Send Data Storage Area p 30 Word po Specifiable Device Symbol X Y M L B D W R Element Name Set the name of the element Conversion When HEX Converts numeric value stored in the data storage area to ASCII decimal sending ASCII Decimal HEX Converts numeric value stored in the data storage area to ASCII hexadecimal ASCII Hexadecimal When ASCII Decimal gt Treats received data as ASCII decimal converts it to numeric value and stores it to the data receiving HEX storage area ASCII Hexadecimal Treats received data as ASCII hexadecimal converts it to numeric value and stores it to the HEX data storage area Fixed Number of Data Fixed Number of Data Fixes the number of data to be sent and received Variable Number of Data Variable Number of Data When sending Specifies the number of data to be sent at the time of the protocol execution and sends the data When receiving Receives data of which
86. 2192 to M2255 M1192 to M1255 M3192 to M3255 M1192 to M1255 The link devices are allocated as above and the link device numbers are different according to the station number for the FX3 series the numbers are fixed However the link device numbers are linked to the corresponding devices The link device head number of FX5 PLC can be set individually for each station however unifying the numbers in the system is recommended to prevent disordered numbers nk time ae The link time indicates the cycle time from the start of parameter message editing until link devices are updated and parameter message editing is restarted The link time varies depending on the number of linked units master station and slave stations and the number of linked devices as shown in the table below co 0o CO1 AJ OJN 2 N N NETWORK 2 4 Specifications 2 5 Wiring This section explains about the wiring For the wiring of FX3 PLC refer to LAFX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Wiring procedure 1 Preparing for wiring Confirm the inverter connection method Page 19 Cable 2 Turn OFF the PLC power Before wiring make sure that the PLC power is OFF 3 Wire the communication equipment Connect the RS 485 communication equipment Page 21 Connection diagram Cable Select cables using the procedure described below 1 air cable ma Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting RS 485 communication e
87. 3 Click Execute to execute verification and display the result oe 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 7 6 6 Protocol Setting 9 6 Packet Setting The send packet to the counterpart device and the receive packet from the counterpart device of when process is executed are registered in a protocol The packet which are set with the predefined protocol support function is created with some elements Elements are the data portion of the packet to be sent or received Up to 32 elements can be set in a packet Ex Example of a packet configuration ll xample of format of packet from counterpart device Header Station No Command Read data Chsebeada Terminator 02H 00 to 99 WT 0000 to 9999 03H llPacket elements setting with the predefined protocol function for the format shown above Data area Configure the packet in the order of header data area and terminator Check code and static data can be placed after the terminator 1 Element Length static data non conversion variable conversion variable check code non verified reception Set the packet in the packet setting screen displayed by the following operation of GX Works3 4 Protocol setting screen gt Desired packet setting Window Protocol No 1 Protocol Name H7B RD Operation Mode Packet Type Send Packet Packet Name H7B RD Operation Mode Element List Set emi oe CCS d c 3Hede Jena o ENOllBte O o ooo Lem eee Variable
88. 3 M1192 to M1223 D30 to D33 M1192 to M1255 D30 to D37 Station FX5 D x 40 M y 256 D x 40 M y 256 D x 40 No 4 to D x 43 to M y 287 to D x 43 to M y 319 to D x 47 FX3 D40 to D43 M1256 to M1287 D40 to D43 M1256 to M1319 D40 to D47 Station FX5 D x 50 M y 320 D x 50 M y 320 D x 50 No 5 to D x 53 to M y 351 to D x 53 to M y 383 to D x 57 D50 to D53 M1320 to M1651 D50 to D53 M1320 to M1383 D50 to D57 Station FX5 D x 60 M y 384 D x 60 M y 384 D x 60 No 6 to D x 63 to M y 415 to D x 63 to M y 447 to D x 67 FX3 D60 to D63 M1384 to M1415 D60 to D63 M1384 to M1447 D60 to D67 Station FX5 D x 70 M y 448 D x 70 M y 448 D x 70 No 7 to D x 73 to M y 479 to D x 73 to M y 511 to D x 77 FX3 D70 to D73 M1448 to M1479 D70 to D73 M1448 to M1511 D70 to D77 x Link device head number of data register D y Link device head number of internal relay M When creating a program do not change the information in devices used by other stations If such information is changed the other stations will not operate normally 2 N N NETWORK 1 2 4 Specifications T 18 ex Refresh range pattern 1 link device head number all station D1000 M4000 Master station FX5 PLC slave station FX5 PLC x 3 Master station StationNo D1000 to D1003 D1000 to D1003 D1000 to D1003 D1000 to D1003 0 M4000 to M4031 M4000 to M4031 M4000 to M4031 M4000 to M4031 Slave stations
89. 37H 027 30H 32H 37H 5027 35H 30H 32H 37H HEX FEO3H FFFEO3H FFFFFEO3H APPENDIX 2 2 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol T llData Flow Reverse Direction No complement calculation is designated Reference Hexadecimal 1FDH Decimal 509 ASCII hexadecimal O DF 44H 46H DF1 44H 46H 31H DF10 44H 46H 31H 30H ASCII decimal 90 39H 30H 905 39H 30H 35H 9050 39H30H 35H 30H HEX FDO1H FD0100H FD010000H One s complement is designated One s complement for 0000 01FDH FFFF FEO2H When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FEO2H decimal 65026 ASCII hexadecimal ee 20 32H 30H 20E 32H 30H 45H 20EF 32H 30H 45H 46H ASCII decimal 62 36H 32H 620 36H 32H 30H 6205 36H 32H 30H 35H HEX O2FEH 02FEFFH 02FEFFFFH Two s complement is designated Two s complement for 0000 01FDH FFFF FE03H When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FEO3H decimal 65027 ASCII hexadecimal E 30 30H 33H 30E 33H 30H 45H 30EF 33H 30H 45H 46H ASCII decimal EJ 72 37H 32H 720 37H 32H 30H 7205 37H 32H 30H 35H HEX 08FEHH 03FEFFH 03FEFFFFH lllData Flow Byte Swap No complement calculation is designated Reference Hexadecimal 1FDH Decimal 509 One s complement is designated One s complement for 0000 01F
90. 38 Serial communication error Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication 120 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 9 Troubleshooting MError code When the serial communication error turns ON the error code is stored in the corresponding device specified in the table below SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 SD8063 SD8438 code The error code hexadecimal is below 7010H 76 H Parity error overrun error or framing error Inverter communication error K Page 121 MiList of error codes for inverter communication The error codes shown below are stored when a communication error is caused by an inverter communication instruction won maed es 7620H Computer NAK error Inverter sent the error code HO When errors have The number of retries exceeded the allowable number because of an error occurred consecutively in the transfer request data beyond the allowable 7621H Parity error Inverter sent the error code H1 number P fees The contents are different from the specified parity inverter is brought to an alarm stop 7622H Sum check error Inverter sent the error code H2 The sum check code in the computer is different from the sum value calculated from the data received by the inverter 7623H Protocol error Inverter sent the error code H3 There is a syntax error in data received by the inverter Or data reception is not co
91. 4 75 2T6 n ms n Number of send receives Te 1 Te 2 Te 3 T3 1 ms 1 Time required for one instructions T4 T5 and Tg n are calculated as given in the following table T4 1 11 INT Scan ime 1 x Scan time INT SUERTE 1 x Scan time is INT 1 S ti 4 x Scan time b ine Te n e For Scan time lt T7 n Tg n To n _ T7 n Ts n Te n 1 INT CC xS mes 1 x Scan time INT Sean tine 1 x Scan time e For Scan time T7 n Tg n To n INT n Te n To nl 45 x Scan time INT 1 x Scan time Scan time Scan time T7 n T gf vadasi 4 Communication speed bps x No of characters sent received x 1 character length x 1000 Tg n Data check time in inverters 2 Refer to L Page 75 for the number of sent received characters 3 Refer to L gt Page 75 for the data check time of inverters 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 4 Specifications liNumber of sent received characters is poe I omm Dum 1 c m oie cq pis pem wo oom NE cay e de m de eee ca qo c e dem IVRD Change of the 2nd 11 4 15 11 20 parameter is unnecessary Change of the 2nd 11 4 15 11 4 15 11 20 parameter is necessary IVWR Change of the 2nd parameter is unnecessary Change of the 2nd 11 4 15 11 4 15 13 4 17 parameter is necessary IVBWR Change of the 2nd parameter is unnecessary IVMC Change of the 2nd 11 4 15 11 4
92. 4 2 Procedure before Operation Communication device Built in RS 485 port Since it is built into the CPU module there is no need to add 50 m or less equipment Communication FX5 485 BD CH2 Mounted on top of the CPU module there is no change in the 50 m or less board installation space requirements Communication FX5 485ADP CH3 CH4 Mount the communication adapter to the left of the CPU 1200 m or less adapter module 1 Assigned to CH3 or CH4 in order of proximity to CPU module 4 4 Specifications This section describes the communication specifications and performance of the inverter communication function Communication specifications Number of connectable units Maximum of 16 Transmission standard RS 485 standard Maximum overall distance When FX5 485ADP is used 1200 m or less When using built in RS 485 port or FX5 485 BD 50 m or less Baud rate Only FREQROL A800 supports 57 600 bps or more Applicable inverter FREQROL A800 Series Built in RS 485 terminal FREQROL F700PJ Series Built in PU connector FREQROL F700P Series Built in RS 485 terminal FREQROL A700 Series Built in RS 485 terminal FREQROL E700 Series Built in PU connector FR E7TR optional FREQROL E700EX Series Built in PU connector FREQROL D700 Series Built in PU connector FREQROL V500 Series Built in PU connector FR A5NR optional Inverter instruction codes and parameters The tables below show the inverter ins
93. 43300 Termination switch OPEN rmn uU aU Termination 41100 resistor selector amp switch MF X5 485ADP Termination resistor selector switch A gt 1100 OPEN 3300 Termination resistor selector OPEN gt switch Connection diagram Use one pair wiring for an N N Network Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485 BD FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP FX5 485ADP FX5 485ADP SDA TXD SDB TXD Terminal resistor 110 Q Terminal resistor Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 1 Make sure to perform Class D grounding on the shield of the twisted pair cable to be connected 2 Make sure to provide a termination resistor at both ends of the wire The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have buil tin termination resistors Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q 2 N N NETWORK 2 5 Wiring resistor selector 21 22 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below Perform D class grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When the independent grounding can not be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the following LAFX5U User s manual Hardware FXS5UC User s manual Hardware Other amp O
94. 438 Error code number of serial communication error the error code is stored The error code hexadecimal stored in the devices above are as follows 7700H N N Network parameter setting error For error code above is stored refer to L Page 35 The serial communication error and serial communication error codes are not cleared even when communication is restored They are cleared when turning OFF ON the PLC power or resetting the system 2 N N NETWORK 2 8 Troubleshooting llCheck while data transfer sequence is being executed Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON While N N Network is being executed the data transfer sequence ON flag remains ON SM9056 Remains ON while data transfer is being executed SM8191 Data transfer sequence ON MError flags When a link error occurs in the master station or slave station of the N N Network the data transfer sequence error flag turns ON Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON FX5 only SM9040 SM9041 SM9042 SM9043 SM9044 SM9045 SM9046 SM8183 SM8184 SM8185 SM8186 SM8187 SM8188 SM8189 FX3 Series compatible MError codes When the data transfer sequence error turns ON the error code is stored in the following device FX5 only SD9061 SD9062 SD9063 SD9064 SD9065 SD9066 SD9067 SD8211 SD8212 SD8213 SD8214 SD8215 SD8216 SD8217 FX3 Series compatible The error codes hexadecimal stored in the
95. 5 RS 422 communication In FX5 itis possible to use a serial port for up to a maximum of 4 channels simultaneously by using MC protocol Depending on each serial port the available communication and channel number are decided In case of RS 232C communication 1 1 For communication in accordance with RS 232C itis 1 to 1 connection Make sure that the total extension distance is 15 m or less Personal computer FX5 PLC RS 232C communication equipment In case of RS 485 RS 422 communication 1 N For communication in accordance with RS 485 RS 422 up to 16 PLC Slave Nodes can be connected Make sure that the total extension distance is 1200m or less When using built in RS 485 port or FX5 485 BD 50m or less Personal computer FX5 PLC FX5 PLC Station No O Station No 15 RS 232C RS 485 communication converter communication equipment FX 485PC IF communication equipment 3 MC PROTOCOL 52 3 5 Wiring One pair wiring and two pair wiring are applicable for communication in accordance with RS 485 RS 422 The wiring method is determined for each application Refer to the table below and perform suitable wiring MC protocol When the message waiting time should be 70 ms or less When the message waiting time may be more than 70 ms Recommended wiring method O Applicable wiring method X Non applicable wiring method 1 When computer link is added to an
96. 5ADP FX5 485ADP equipment SDA TXD Terminal resistor 110 Q 110 Q Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 1 Make sure to perform Class D grounding on the shield of the twisted pair cable to be connected 2 Make sure to provide a termination resistor at both ends of the wire The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have built in termination resistors Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q WETwo pair wiring Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485 BD FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP FX5 485ADP RS 485 RS 422 Communication equipment FX5 485ADP A SDA A SDA TXD IN TXD SDB A SDB SDB TXD TXD mo TXD RDA RDA RXD RXD RDB RDA RXD RXD RXD RXD Terminal resistor J T 330 Q x 2 Terminal resistor 330 0x2 LINK SG Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 1 Make sure to perform Class D grounding on the shield of the twisted pair cable to be connected 2 Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line Set built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP to 330 Q depending on the the terminal resistor selector switch 3 MC PROTOCOL 56 3 5 Wiring Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below Perform D class grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or le
97. 6 bit unit to a bit device by randomly specifying the device number Number of word access Random Writes data in 1 word unit or 2 word unit to a word device by randomly specifying points x12 number of Writes data in 1 word 16 bits unit or 2 word unit to MC protocol compatible devices Number of word access or buffer memory of intelligent unit points x12 number of double word access points x14 1920 Assumes an n point part of a bit device or word device as 1 block and reads data by 960 points randomly specifying the multiple blocks When specifying bit devices 16 bit is intended in 1 point Assumes an n point part of a MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of 960 points intelligent unit as 1 block and reads data by randomly specifying the multiple blocks When specifying bit devices 16 bit is intended in 1 point Multiple block 0406H 0000H batch reading Device Read Block 0080H 0082H Assumes an n point part of a MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of 960 points Multiple block 1406H 0000H Assumes an n point part of a bit device or word device as 1 block and writes data by 960 points batch writing randomly specifying the multiple blocks Device Write When specifying bit devices 16 bit is intended in 1 point Block 0080H Assumes an n point part of a MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of 960 points intelligent unit as 1 block and writes data by randomly specifying mult
98. 8 3 MCPROTOCOL An MC protocol is a protocol to access an equipment compatible with MC protocol from a CPU module and external equipment PC or indicator etc using serial communication In case of a serial port of FX5 communication is possible by MC protocol QnA compatible 3C AC frame 3 1 Function Summary An MC protocol function is a function to access an equipment compatible with MC protocol from a CPU module and counterpart device equipments PC or GOT etc using serial communication Features Monitoring of the system is enabled because device of MC protocol compatible equipment can be read by sending an MC protocol request message as shown in the following diagram from external equipment connected by serial communication Further it can even write or reset a MC protocol compatible equipment Reading of the device Request message Message format of MC protocol _ Message format of MC protocol _ of MC protocol Header p Address Command header Message format of MC protocol _ Message format of MC protocol _ of MC protocol Header eader Sent message 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 1 Function Summary 3 2 Procedures before Operation The flow chart below shows the MC protocol setting procedures up until data link 1 Check communication specifications K Refer to Page 50 Specifications Communication specifications link specifications Link time 2 System configuration and selection KL Refer to Page 49
99. 85ADP Twisted pair cable 0 3 mm or more Crossover RR Crossover F f Crossover wiring j wiring wiring 2 0 3 mm or more SISISISIRIRIR DIDIDIDIDIDID a BIAIBJAIB AIBIA E WP N Class D grounding SISISISIRIRIR oDDD D BIAIBIAIBIAIBIA Inverter ne SP oPEPERPE FR E7TR Inverter grounding G Oo For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to case of one inverter for the connection diagram For branching perform wiring as shown below 2 wire type Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Perform crossover wiring 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring When connecting a 100 termination resistor set the switch to 100 Q For crossover wiring of a shielded cable using the SG terminal set the terminal 2 SG selector switch to the right ON to change terminal 2 to SG With this setting analog inputs to terminal 2 become invalid 4 sc SDB SDA To next station inverter BFR AS5NR e When one inverter is connected Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Dd x X Twisted pair cable Ed dl 0 3 mm or more Lp cc el 2 a Terminal A array or more Terminal block Screw size M3 SP4 S08 ROA ROB RoR se JAAA M 0 3jmm Inverter Terminal symbol Connect them to the serial port of the PLC e When multiple u
100. A900H lenge of device Decimal numbers that the unit at the access point bears t MN 3 MC PROTOCOL 1 3 MC Protocol Command 6 62 CCH CCOOH 62H 6200H AFH AFOOH BOH B000H B4H B400H Specify within the range of device numbers that the unit at the access point bears Index register lila e BM al 32 bit LZ LZ File register Word R R ZR ZR W 16 bit Z Z W W Unit access Link register Word device Link special register S B5H Hexadecimal SW B500H Module access device G ABH Decimal O G ABOOH 1 ASCII code When a device code is less than the specified number of characters add ASCII code 2AH or space ASCII code 20H at the end of the device code Binary code When a device code is less than the specified size add OOH at the end of the device code 2 QO FX5 device No FX5 device 3 It is necessary to make Device memory extension specification of the sub command to ON 1 3 8 Troubleshooting This section explains troubleshooting Checking communication status based on LED indication Check the status of the LED indications of RD and SD on the CPU module or the communication board communication adapter On On The data is being sent or received o LEN On Off The data is received but is not sent On The data is being sent but is not receiv
101. C instruction send data 1 Mode error corresponding to send data 1 and 2 but is not brought to an alarm stop IVMC instruction send data 2 Instruction code error 7648H IVMC instruction send data 1 Mode error IVMC instruction send data 2 Data range error 7649H IVMC instruction send data 1 Instruction code error IVMC instruction send data 2 Mode error 764AH IVMC instruction send data 1 Instruction code error IVMC instruction send data 2 Instruction code error 764BH IVMC instruction send data 1 Instruction code error IVMC instruction send data 2 Data range error 764CH IVMC instruction send data 1 Data range error IVMC instruction send data 2 Mode error 764DH IVMC instruction send data 1 Data range error IVMC instruction send data 2 Instruction code error 764EH IVMC instruction send data 1 Data range error IVMC instruction send data 2 Data range error MError flags The operation error flag turns ON when an operation error occurs in the inverter communication instruction Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON SMO Latest self diagnostic error Turns ON when an operation error occurs Including the annunciator ON SM1 Latest self diagnostic error Not including the annunciator ON MError codes When the operation error flag turns ON the error code hexadecimal is stored in the operation error code SDO SD8067 For the error codes stored in the device refer to the operation error of ea
102. CH1 compatible with FX3 Series being CH1 Station 1 to 7 SD8419 Serial communication Stores the communication function of the serial M L O operation mode CH1 communication operation with the SM SD compatible with Station 1 to 7 FX3 Series CH1 SD8438 Serial communication error Stores the error code when error occurs in the serial M L O code CH2 communication with the SM SD compatible with FX3 Series Station 1 to 7 being CH2 SD8425 Serial communication Stores the set communication parameter with the SM SD M L O settings CH2 compatible with FX3 Series being CH2 Station 1 to 7 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices 39 40 SD8439 Serial communication Store the communication function of the serial M L O operation mode CH2 communication operation with the SM SD compatible with Station 1 to 7 FX3 Series in CH2 SD8201 Present link scan time Current value of the network cycle time M L O Station 1 to 7 SD8202 Maximum link scan time Maximum value of the network cycle time M L O Station 1 to 7 SD8203 Number of communication Number of data transfer sequence errors occurred in the L x O error at master station master station Station 1 to 7 SD8204 Number of communication Number of data transfer sequence errors occurred in other M L O error at slave station 1 slave station Except station 1 SD8205 Number of communication However data sequence errors that occurred in the local O atrorat slave station 2 station slave
103. Communication Settings llCautions during setting Caution for setting the PU communication check time interval Pr 122 During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed 9999 periodically When communication with the PLC is not executed 0 Set the communication time in the following cases 1 to 9998 When it is necessary to monitor absence of communication for a certain time and stop the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed continuously When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point when the PLC mode is changed from RUN STOP The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configurations and inverters For the method of use refer to LAthe respective inverter manual 94 Pr 37 Speed display 0 or 0 01 to 0 Frequency display setting 9998 0 01 to 9998 Machine speed at 60 Hz Pr 146 Built in potentiometer switching 0 or 1 0 The built in frequency setting knob is valid 1 The built in frequency setting knob is invalid Pr 342 Communication EEPROM write 0 or 1 0 Write to EEPROM and RAM selection 1 Write to RAM only 1 This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr 37 Set Pr 37 to 0 when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC If any value other than O is set and the instruction code HFF is set to 01 the frequency may not be set or monitored normally 2 SetPr 146 to 1 when changing the freque
104. Content range data types Uy Dummy Input the character string UO7 CENE Character string ANYSTRING SINGLE n1 Communication CH K1 to 4 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16 U n2 Number of protocols to be executed continuously K1 to 8 16 bit unsigned binary bit 16 bit unsigned binary binary ANY16 U s Start device containing the control data KL Page 192 Word ANY16 ARRAY Number of elements 18 d Head bit device number to output the instruction execution ANYBIT ARRAY status Number of elements 2 1 In the case of the ST language and the FBD LD language U displays as UO BApplicable devices Bog Ji Ime le e 7 j Je j je 7 eo o jJ et o gg F Je j J ee e JO ee 1 File registers set by each local device and program cannot be used 2 T STand C cannot be used 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 1 6 8 Programming 9 Control data Device s s 2 s 3 s 4 s 5 s 6 s 7 s 8 s 11 s 12 s 13 s 14 s 15 s 16 s 17 Result of executed protocols Resulting number of executed protocols Execution protocol number 6 Execution protocol number 7 Execution protocol number 8 Verification match Receive packet number 1 Verification match Receive packet number 2 Verification match Receive packet number 3 Verification match Receive packet number 4 Verification match Receive packe
105. D PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 8 Programming Two words from the start device number are used for the device number of monitoring data and the number of monitor data The devices with the device numbers after the first two words are used for the monitor data area Monitoring data device No Among the data stored in the monitor data area the number of the device in which the oldest data is stored The monitor data device number is initialized when the send receive data monitoring starts The storage range is from the start of the monitor data area to the start of the monitor data area monitor data size 1 When monitoring continued bit 0 OFF is set for data area full stop specification The start device numbers of the monitor data area are stored until the size of the data area where the data is stored and set exceeds the size of the monitor data When the monitor data area is overwritten because the number of monitor data exceeds the monitor data size the device in which the oldest data is stored is updated When monitoring stop bit 0 ON is set for data area full stop specification The start device number of the monitor data area is stored Number of monitor data The number of monitor data stored in the monitor data area is stored The number of monitor data is initialized when the send receive data monitoring starts The storage range is from 0 to the size of the monitor data The number of monitor data does not increase any
106. D8175 SD9083 Number of retries setting Check of the number of communication retry times that occur status same description as SD8179 M M M SD9084 Monitoring time setting status Monitoring time check However the slave station stores the doubled value of the setting value of the master station O Except station 1 O Except station 2 O Except station 3 O Except station 4 O Except station 5 O Except station 6 O Except station 7 R Read only M Master station station number 0 L Slave station station number 1 to 7 1 When latch setting is set to latch change the device value with a program or an engineering tool and powering OFF ON or reset the system to operate the corresponding functions with the changed value 2 With latch settings Read write No latch settings Read only BFX3 Series compatible SD8173 Station number settings Provided to check the station number M L O status Station 1 to 7 SD8174 Number of slave stations Provided to check the number of slave stations M L O setting status Station 1 to 7 SD8175 Refresh range setting status Provided to check the refresh range M L O Station 1 to 7 SD8063 Serial communication error Stores the error code when error occurs in the serial M L O code CH1 communication with the SM SD compatible with FX3 Series Station 1 to 7 being CH1 SD8405 Serial communication Stores the set communication parameter with the SM SD M L O settings
107. DH FFFF FEO2H When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FEO2H decimal 65026 2 2 APPENDIX 8 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Two s complement is designated Two s complement for 0000 01FDH FFFF FEOS3H When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FEO3H decimal 65027 Calculation p rocedure for 16 bit CRC for MODBUS This is an error check method to be used when data are transmitted received with the RTU mode of the MODBUS protocol The data length of CRC is fixed to 2 bytes 16 bits and the CRC is calculated every 1 byte 8 bits from the start of the calculating range according to the following procedure 1 Load a 16 bit register whose bits are all 1 Exclusive OR XOR the first 1 byte 8 bits of the calculating range with 8 bits in above 1 Shift the result of step 2 for one bit right AUN If the least significant bit in above 2 is 1 exclusive OR XOR the result of 3 with the generator polynomial A001H If the least significant bit is 0 shift the result of step 3 one bit right operation described in 3 without the exclusive OR XOR operation e Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 8 times gt Exclusive OR XOR the result of the above 5 with the next 1 byte 8 bits N Repeat step 3 through 6 unt
108. Data transfer sequence errors in a station itself cannot be detected FX3 Series compatible Do not turn ON with program or engineering tool Data transfer sequence error does not turn OFF even if the communication comes back to normal The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF ON STOP9RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON 2 N N NETWORK 41 2 9 Related Devices 42 SM9056 R Read only Precautions Do not turn ON with program or engineering tool SD8500 R Read only Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Serial communication errors are not cleared even after communication has recovered its normal status Cleared the devices when power is turned OFF ON STOPRUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON Stores the set communication parameter in the communication settings SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 SD8405 SD8425 Stores the setting of the communication parameter R Read only The description of the communication parameter is as follows b1 Parity bit b2 b1 b2 1 1 Even b4 Baud rate b7 b6 b5 b4 b5 1 0 1 0 38400 bps b6 b7 b12 H W type RS 485 Precautions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices num ber settings status Stores the set station number in the communication settings Page 22 This d
109. Element Mame ETX Code Type ASCII Control Code Setting Value Input Control Code Setting Range 1 to 50 OK Cancel Element Name Set the name of the element Code Type Select a data type of the setting value ASCII String ASCII Control Code HEX Setting Value Set data within 1 to 50 bytes Setting example The setting ranges that can be set for each code type are as follows ASCII String ABC ASCII String 20H to 7EH ASCII Control Code US ASCII Control Code 00H to 1FH and control code of 7FH HEX FFFF HEX hexadecimal data of 00H to FFH Point Multiple static data elements can be placed to desired positions in the data portion 1 90 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting Non conversion Variable Use this element to send the data in the data device as a part of a send packet or store a part of a receive packet to the device Use when there is a variable element in the packet format that depends on the system For data examples of non conversion variable refer to L gt Page 219 Data examples of Non conversion Variable Window Clament CFFE Nm mmuinmmcimm Wis ris hla O ar CIS TEN SELL Pea ey On varkat amp CI IL 1 Element Name Save Address Fixed Length Variable Length Fred Length v Data Length Maximum Data Length fi Setting Range 1 to 2048 Unit of Stored Data Lower Byte Upper Byte Byte Swap Disable Lower gt Upper
110. LC automatically retries communication up to 3 times Hence when a password disable error occurs in the inverter in which display of the number of times of password disable error is enabled using Pr 297 please note that the number of times of password disable error displayed in accordance with the setting of Pr 297 may not be the same as the actual number of times of password input error as described below Do not execute automatic retry re driving of an inverter communication instruction using a sequence program when writing data to Pr 297 M Cases in which a password disable error occurs in an inverter communication instruction and the actual number of times of disable error in such cases 1 Ifan incorrect password is written in Pr 297 due to a typing mistake number of times of password disable error will be 3 from one execution of inverter instruction 2 Ifthe password cannot be written in Pr 297 correctly due to noise etc the maximum number of times of password disable error is 3 When registering the password When registering the password in the inverter using an inverter communication instruction write the password to Pr 297 read Pr 297 and then confirm that registration of the password is completed normally If writing of the password to Pr 297 is not completed normally due to noise etc the PLC automatically retries writing and the registered password may be reset by the retry 1 The FX PLC executes the first communicati
111. LC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion board and expansion adapter Extension modules bus conversion module and connector conversion module Battery INTRODUCTION This manual explains the communication specifications and settings of the serial communication of FX5 It should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user Regarding use of this product This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions into the system Note If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a prof
112. LL 1IProgramming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks This instruction sends and receives data in non protocol communication using the communication board or communication adapter connected to the CPU module or using the built in RS 485 port to the CPU module ENO RS2 EN s n1 n2 n3 d EZI e eon o 2 09 Selingdala llContent range data types s Head device storing send data 16 bit signed binary ANY16 character string n1 Number of send data 0 to 4096 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16 U d Head device storing receive data 16 bit signed binary ANY16 character string n2 Amount of received data 0 to 4096 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16 U n3 Communication CH K1 to 4 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16 U Applicable devices 9o b o e o o J o o j a o en J d o pue ue 1 LSTand C cannot be used n3 2 Bitspecification of word device cannot be used 8 Only nibble specification of bit device can be used Bola cred This instruction sends and receives data via non protocol communication by way of built in RS 485 port communication board or communication adapter This instruction specifies the head device storing the sent data from the CPU module amount of data head device storing the received data and the maximum allowable amount of received data 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 5 Programmin
113. LR added Character other than CR was received after the check sum in sum check code Added and control procedure CR LR added The amount of data was greater than the set value CR LF was received before the terminator When an error code is stored check the following items Wiring Communication settings MError flags The operation error flag turns ON when an operation error occurs in the RS2 instruction Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON SMO Latest self diagnostic error Turns ON when an operation error occurs Including the annunciator ON SM1 Latest self diagnostic error Not including the annunciator ON MError codes When the operation error flag turns ON the error code hexadecimal is stored in the operation error code SDO SD8067 The error codes stored in the device are shown as follows 2822H A device was specified that cannot Wrong operand set for the RS2 instruction When an error code is stored be specified with the instruction check the following items 3405H Data was entered outside of the The operand device number range or data value set for the Program range that can be specified RS2 instruction is out of range Communication settings 2820H A device or label specified with the The operand device number range or data value set for the instruction was entered outside of RS2 instruction is out of range the range that can be used 1810H The s
114. N N Network Control procedure NeW emt muegn 7H SSS rea Fee 2 N N NETWORK 2 4 Specifications Link specifications Link pattern and number of link points Settings of the link pattern are performed with GX Works3 Serial Communication setting Page 22 Communication Setting The number of occupied points of the link device differ depending on the number of link patterns and local stations to be used The devices to be occupied are assigned according to the head number of the link device When an FX3 PLC are used even if the link device numbers are different from that of FX5 PLC the link device numbers of FX3 PLC are fixed the link devices corresponding to its station number are linked Master Station FX5 D x M y D x M y D x station No 0 to D x 3 to M y 31 to D x 3 to M y 63 to D x 7 FX3 DO to D3 M1000 to M1031 DO to D3 M1000 to M1063 DO to D7 Slave Station FX5 D x10 M y 64 D x 10 M y 64 D x10 stations No 1 to D x 13 to M y 95 to D x 13 to M y 127 to D x 17 D10 to D13 M1064 to M1095 D10 to D13 M1064 to M1127 D10 to D17 Station FX5 D x 20 M y 128 D x 20 M y 128 D x 20 No 2 to D x 23 to M y 159 to D x 23 to M y 191 to D x 27 FX3 D20 to D23 M1128 to M159 D20 to D23 M1128 to M1191 D20 to D27 Station FX5 D x 30 M y 192 D x 30 M y 192 D x 30 No 3 to D x 33 to M y 223 to D x 33 to M y 255 to D x 37 FX3 D30 to D3
115. N when serial communication error of CH3 occurs M L O CH3 Station 1 to 7 SM8530 Serial communication error Turns ON when serial communication error of CH4 occurs M L O CH4 Station 1 to 7 SM9040 Data communication error Turns ON when data transfer sequence error of master L X O Master station station occurs Station 1 to 7 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices SM9041 SM9042 SM9043 SM9044 SM9045 SM9046 SM9047 SM9056 SM9080 SM9081 R Read only R W Read Write M master station station number 0 L slave station station number 1 to 7 Turns ON when data transfer sequence error of slave station occurs However data sequence errors that occurred in the local station slave station cannot be detected Data transfer sequence error Slave station 1 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 2 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 3 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 4 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 5 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 6 M L O Except station 1 O Except station 2 O Except station 3 O Except station 4 O Except station 5 O Except station 6 Data transfer sequence error O Slave station 7 Except station 7 Data transfer sequence ON Remains ON while data transfer is being executed M L O Station 1 to 7 Station number settings SD Turns ON when SD latch setting is set for the station number M L O
116. OCOL COMMUNICATION 5 6 Communication Settings BSM SD Setting C Latch Setting Set the latch of SM SD device Bdwanced Settings Do Mot Latch Bbit Process Mode Do Mat Latch Time out Period Do Not Latch Do Mot Latch Do Not Latch The SM SD device of FX3 series compatibility Digable Header Setting Value Terminator Setting Value E FE3 Series Gompatibility SM SD for Compatible Communication board CH2 XX Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt Extended Board Window The following screen will be displayed if FX5 232 BD or FX5 485 BD is set for the extended board and Non protocol Communication is set for the communication protocol type Fixed setting and SM SD setting are the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 llBasic Settings E Extended Board Set the extended board type Extended Board FXb 185 BD E Communication Protocol Type Communication Pratacal Type Advanced Settings Set communication protocol type Mon protacal Communication Set detailed setting Data Length bit Parity Bit Odd Stop Bit Ibit Baud Rate 8 B lbps Header Not Added Header Setting Value O2000000 Terminator Mat Added bes Terminator Setting Value 3p HOO ORO Control Mode RS 2320 Control Mode RS 485 Sum Check Code Control Procedure Ma Contral Line Half Duplex Bi directional Communication Mot Added Format
117. OL COMMUNICATION 5 Programming 153 5 8 Troubleshooting This chapter explains troubleshooting and error codes Checking communication status based on LED display Check the status of the LED display of RD and SD on the CPU module or the communication board communication adapter On n Data is being sent or received Off Data is being received but not being transmitted Off n Data is being transmitted but not being received Off Off Data is neither being transmitted nor being received o or When normally sending and receiving data with non protocol communication the LEDs both flash brightly If they do not flash check the wiring and the communication settings Checking installation Connection status The communication cannot be operated if the PLC and the communication board communication adapter are not connected correctly For the connection procedure refer to the following FX5U User s manual Hardware FX5UC User s manual Hardware Wiring Verify that all communication equipment is correctly wired Page 131 Wiring Checking sequence program RS2 instruction cannot be used in the same serial port which is being used for any other communication such as inverter communication Page 212 Combined Use of Serial Communication Checking the communication settings Verify that protocol type is Non protocol Communication When the protocol type is not Non protocol Communication
118. ON in synchronization with the DR DSR signal V D D A DW SM8409 SM8429 Time out flag This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time out time setting device R Read only d l MIF X5 only SD8500 SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 Serial communication error Stores the error code when a serial communication error occurs R code SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Serial communication Stores the setting of the communication parameter R settings SD8560 SD8570 SD8580 SD8590 Amount of remaining send These devices store the amount of remaining send data R data SD8561 SD8571 SD8581 SD8591 Amount of data already This device stores the amount of received data R received SD8563 SD8573 SD8583 SD8593 These devices store the received sum check value R SD8564 SD8574 SD8584 SD8594 Receiving result sum These devices store the sum check value calculated using the R received data SD8565 SD8575 SD8585 SD8595 These devices store the sum check value added to the send data R SD8621 SD8631 SD8641 SD8651 Time out time These devices store the time out time set in the communication R W settings SD8622 SD8632 SD8642 SD8652 8 bit processing mode These devices store the send receive data processing mode set in R W the communication settings SD8623 SD8633 SD8643 SD8653 Header These devices store the contents of headers 1 to
119. Pr 1 Maximum frequency D203 Pr 2 Minimum frequency IVBWR D200 M200 D205 Pr 7 Acceleration time umen Pr 8 Deceleration time Head bit device number of instruction execution status output Communication channel 1 to 4 Instruction Head of writing parameter table execution Number of parameters to be written decimal completed flag Inverter station number 0 to 31 SM8029 RST M10 Write command OFF 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 11 4 8 Programming 3 Multiple inverter commands This instruction writes 2 types of settings operation command and set frequency to the inverter and reads 2 types of data inverter status monitor output frequency etc from the inverter at the same time For information concerning inverter communication instruction expressions and execution format refer to L1 1IProgramming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks ENO IVMC EN s1 s2 s3 n d1 d2 Selingdala llContents range data type s1 Inverter station number KO to 31 16 bit 16 bit signed binary binary ANY 16 s2 Multiple instructions for inverter Send receive data type Refer to the following DL LM bit signed binary ANY16 specification s3 Head device of a parameter data to be written to an inverter 16 bit signed binary ANY16 ARRAY Number of elements 2 d1 Head device which stores values to be read from the inverter 16 bit signed binary ANY16 ARRAY Number of elements 2
120. R COMMUNICATION 1 4 8 Programming 07 Operation error Operation errors pertaining to the instruction are as follows ON 1810 When specified channel is used with another instruction ON 2820 When specified device exceeds the device range ON 3405 When the value specified for s1 is other than KO to 31 When the value specified for s2 is outside the range that can be specified Less than KO K3000 to 9999 K13000 to 32767 When the value specified for n is other than K1 to 4 ON 3600 When specified channel is not setting parameter Reads value of the Following inverter station No 6 parameters to storage device for PLC CH1 Example of program using second parameter specification code K Page 117 of FREQROL F700P Series inverter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 902 D100 frequency C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 1902 D101 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 903 D102 frequency C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 1903 D103 Reading contact X1 CINE Command contact sf s2 di n d2 MO Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency IVRD K902 D100 M200 _ p100 o Head bit device number of instruction execution status output Communication channel 1 to 4 Read value storage destination Inverter parameter number decimal Inverter station number O to 31 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias IVRD K6 K1902 D101 K1 M210 D101 The unit is specified by Analog input s
121. S 0 4x2 5 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 5 Wiring Termination resistor setting Make sure to provide a termination resistor at both ends of the wire The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have a built in termination resistor Set the termination resistor selector switch as below Two pair wiring 330 Q One pair wiring 110 Q BI X5U CPU module built in RS 485 port MF X5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port 43300 Termination resistor selector switch OPEN Termination resistor selector 4a switch O 1100 Termination resistor selector switch A gt 1100 OPEN 3300 Termination resistor selector switch Connection diagram RS 232C Representative wiring examples are shown in this section When pin numbers in the counterpart equipment are different wire the pins as shown below Connection diagram between FX5 and personal computer PLC side External equipment operating in accordance with RS 232C FXS 232ADP Using CS RS Using DR ER Name FX5 232 BD Name 9 pin D Sub 9 pin D Sub RO HO omo SG GND s ees s 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 5 Wiring 99 llConnection diagram between FX 485PC IF and the personal computer FX 485PC IF Personal computer SD TXD RS 485 RS 422 lWlOne pair wiring mE Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port RS 485 Communication FX5 485 BD FX5 485 BD FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP FX5 48
122. System Configuration Select communication equipment 3 Wiring K Refer to Page 52 Wiring Wiring with twisted pair cable Wiring example 4 Communication settings K Refer to Page 57 Communication Setting 5 Program creation Basic program Test program For details on operating procedure of GX Works3 refer to the manual below LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual 3 3 System Configuration This section outlines the system configuration required to use the MC protocol You can use up to a maximum of 4 channels FX5UC is maximum of 3 channels of MC protocol function in the CPU module using the built in RS 485 port communication board and communication adapters Allotment of serial ports is set to the following fixed numbers regardless of system configuration MFX5U CPU module IIFX5UC CPU module CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH2 Communication board Communication device mna lial L i Since it is built into the CPU module there is no need to add 50 m or less CH1 equipment Communication FX5 485 BD CH2 Mounted on top of the CPU module there is no change in the 50 m or less board FX5 232 BD installation space requirements iS marless Communication FX5 485ADP CH3 CH4 Mount the communication ada
123. X ode e C6 hb ae Sood doe mV d dE Ed Ida Se DR OE IRE ERE Sob a EE ER ird RR Boe 17 2 5 WIRING cco ce E E Ra EE Gata ea Erud E ddr ur cee ae eee eee gud quar re Eb anes 19 Wining DEOCGCIUEG s Snc dans este dux dace EXP POTE day vo ooo este Sd EIE Sag dus Saito ars d dudes 19 Cables T 19 Termination resistor setting ccc eee mrs 21 Connection GlaGlal 2 uautevecsenegewuss ge Sree econ tek Subs eee Bese ede ee koe O ees 21 Cini mECMCT O 22 2 6 Communication Setting cues Exam RE RR HERR RCRROR RUE aO qd Wee eee ee eb pcd eee 22 2 7 uie 4 2 2 4 20 eee rae Oa eee Oa TTE 25 COMM UIC ANON SEWING aers te cra trices anes 2 ftv ek ete be es deed han Bae nee nae 4S ee eae eae 25 Contents of related deviceS 1 0 hh ss 25 Communication test PPPPPT 27 Create the master station program 1 1 eee rss 29 Create programs for the slave stations 0 0 00 cc rn 31 Cautions on program creation s ceetinacesinssersed todo rend Gee Saw ee Seda S ER ee Se ewe Gee 32 2 8 TFGUDICSNOOUNG e PTrPTT rrmrr 33 Checking communication status based on LED indication 0 0 aaaea ees 33 Checking installation and wiring cc nee eee eee 33 Checking sequence program n asasan eee eee eee 34 Checking the communication setting 0 0 ee eee eee eee eee 34 Checkin
124. X5 485ADP is used 1200 mor less 15 m or less When using built in RS 485 port or FX5 485 BD 50 m or less Protocol type Predefined protocol support Control procedure Communication method Half duplex bi directional communication Baud rate 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Character format 7 bits 8 bits None odd or even 1 bit 2 bits Header Can set it from packet setting Terminator Can set it from packet setting Control line Sum check Can set it from packet setting Predefined protocol specifications Setting method Selected from the predefined protocol library offered By editing the selected protocol a new protocol can be Selected from the user protocol library created Creating Number of protocols Maximum of 64 Number of packets Maximum of 128 One send packet and 16 receive packets can be registered in one protocol Number of elements Maximum of 32 Packet data area size Maximum of 6144 byte Communication type Send only receive only send amp receive KL Page 168 Communication type Execution procedure Protocols can be executed with a dedicated instruction Up to eight protocols can be executed consecutively for S P CPRTCL one instruction execution Receive wait time When set 0 ms timeout does not occurr Number of send retries 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 67 6 4 Specifications Monitoring time 0 to 300000 ms When set 0 ms timeout does not occurr Communication
125. able connect a shielding wire Page 84 Shielded wiring 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring TT Connection method When connecting to RS 485 communication equipment use the 10BASE T cable or shielded twisted pair cables depending on the connection method e 1 PU connector Single wire Termination resistor RJ45 connector Use twisted pair cable or Which is built in the FX5 PLC and must be 10BASE T cable for LAN arranged by the user for the inverter and supplied with or built in for other communication equipment A800 F700P A700 series BiBuilt in RS 485 terminal e n the case of 1 to 1 connection Twisted pair cable n the case of 1 to n connection Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable Built in RS 485 terminal terminal terminal F700PJ E700 E700EX D700 V500 series MPU connector n the case of 1 to 1 connection Termination resistor Distributor 10BASE T 10BASE T cable PU connector 78 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring e n the case of 1 to n connection
126. aders 140 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 Programming Terminator When terminators are set in the communication settings Page 136 the set values are stored in SD8625 and SD8626 for CH1 SD8635 and SD8636 for CH2 SD8645 and SD8646 for CH3 and SD8655 and SD8656 for CH4 Up to 4 terminators can be set Terminator FX5 dedicated CH3 SD8645 Low order byte SD8645 High order byte SD8646 Low order byte SD8646 High order byte CH4 SD8655 Low order byte SD8655 High order byte SD8656 Low order byte SD8656 High order byte When data is sent the stored data in the devices above is added at the end the specified send data When data is received receiving is completed when the stored data in the devices above is received If the first terminator value is OOH the terminator settings are not configured The area before OOH in 1 byte units is used to set the terminators 1 Receiving is completed also when the amount of received data specified by the RS2 instruction is received or when the receiving of data is suspended and the specified time out occurs llSum check When the sum check code is selected as Added in the communication settings Page 136 the sum check is executed for the send and receive data When Added is selected always configure the terminators When data is sent the sum of data terminator is calculated and added to the send data When data is received it i
127. ame channel is used for more than one RS2 instruction 3600H Specified channel is not set in parameter 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 5 8 Troubleshooting 99 5 9 Related Devices List of related devices MIF X5 only Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication R SM8500 SM8510 SM8561 SM8571 SM8562 SM8572 SM8520 SM8530 Serial communication error SM8581 SM8591 Send request flag SM8582 SM8592 Receiving completed flag SM8563 SM8573 SM8583 SM8593 Carrier detection flag SM8564 SM8574 SM8584 SM8594 DSR detection flag SM8565 SM8575 SM8585 SM8595_ Time out flag This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next R set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time out time setting device When this device is set to ON the PLC starts to send R W This device turns ON when receiving is completed R W This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD DCD signal R This device turns ON in synchronization with the DR DSR signal R R Read only R W Read Write BFX3 Series compatible SM8063 SM8438 Serial communication error Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication SM8401 SM8421 SM8404 SM8424 SM8405 SM8425 Sending wait flag This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send Carrier detection flag This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD DCD signal DSR detection flag This device turns
128. at Send E l Not applicable Number of Decimals No Decimal Point Data Storage Area Specification Do gt DO Send data Header _ _8 37 Terminator Header 837 Terminator 1 The indicates a space Data example 2 Conversion HEX ASCII Decimal HEX ASCII Decimal HEX ASCII Decimal Fixed Number of Data Variable Fixed Number of Data Fixed Number of Data Fixed Number of Data Number of Data z Number of Send Data Data Storage Area Specification IDO DO 0 DO Send data Header 837 18 Terminator Header 008 37 000 18 Terminator 1 The indicates a space llBData example 3 Conversion HEX ASCII Hexadecimal HEXASCII Hexadecimal HEXASCII Hexadecimal Fixed Number of Data Variable Fixed Number of Data Fixed Number of Data Fixed Number of Data Number of Data Number of Send Data Number of Send Digits of Data Variable Number of Digits Blank padded Character at Send Not applicable Number of Decimals Not applicable 2 2 APPENDIX 0 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Send data Header 345 Terminator Header 345 _ 12 Terminator Header 345 12 Terminator 1 The indicates a space Operation of Sign Character llSending E Conversion HEXASCII Decimal Number of Send Data 1 Conversion Unit Word Number of Send Digits of Data 5 Unigned Data Storage Area Send DO 1 FFFFH Value 39 65535 Signed Sign Character
129. ata Decimal point position In the decimal point position area the decimal point position is set as follows 12345678 90 100 64H 1234567 890 1000 3E8H 1 234567890 1234567890 499602D2H 1000000000 3B9ACAO00H llRange of value that can be used in the data storage area The following table shows the range of value that can be used in the data storage area HEX ASCII decimal Unsigned 0 to 65535 0H to FFFFH PISSIINGOCIIOI HEA Double word O to 4294967295 0H to FFFFFFFFH Signed o 32768 to 32767 8000H to FFFFH OH to 7FFFH mo word 2147483648 to 214748364 80000000H to FFFFFFFFH 0H to 7FFFFFFFH 1 86 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting Conversion Reo Wie eee Tie Double word OH to FFFFFFFFH llSettable devices Settable devices to data storage area is follows Device Setting range Remarks HEX ASCII hexadecimal Link register Input 0 to 1023 When the assignment has been changed the devices including the Output one having the maximum device number after the change can be accessed Internal relay 0 to 32767 Latch relay Link relay Bo File register Ro Data register 0 to 7999 Considerations for configuring packet element To place a Conversion variable in a packet the following requirements need to be met BITo place Conversion variable in send packet Multiple Conversion variable elements can be placed in one packet and they can be placed in desired
130. bes the communication specifications and performance of non protocol communication Transmission standard RS 485 and RS 422 standard RS 232C standard Maximum overall distance When FX5 485ADP is used 1200 m or less 15 m or less When using built in RS 485 port or FX5 485 BD 50 m or less Number of Transfer Data 0 to 4096 Protocol type Control procedure Non protocol communication Communication method Half duplex bi directional communication full duplex bi directional communication Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Character format Start bit Seb 7 bits 8 bits None odd or even 1 bit 2 bits Header Provided or not provided Terminator Provided or not provided Control line EU Provided or not provided Sum check Provided or not provided 130 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 4 Specifications 5 5 Wiring This section explains about the wiring Wiring procedure 1 Preparing for wiring Prepare cables and termination resistors required for wiring Page 131 Cable 2 Turn OFF the PLC power Before wiring make sure that the PLC power is OFF 3 Wire the communication equipment Connect the RS 485 RS 232C communication equipment Page 134 Connection diagram Cable Select cables using the procedure described below Twisted pair cable Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting RS 485 communication equipment The specifications of the cables used in wiring are shown
131. bundle the power line control line and communication cables together with or lay them close to the main circuit high voltage line load line or power line As a guideline lay the power line control line and communication cables at least 100 mm 3 94 away from the main circuit high voltage line load line or power line 2 Ground the shield of the shield wire or shielded cable at one point on the PLC However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Before modifying the program in operation forcible output running or stopping the PLC read through this manual carefully and ensure complete safety An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents NWARNING Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from an engineering tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Turn off the power to the P
132. cable or solid cable as is or use a wire ferrule with insulating sleeve When using a stranded cable or solid cable as is e Twist the end of stranded wire and make sure that there are no loose wires e Please do not solder plate the ends of the cable e e 5 mm 9 mm 0 27 0 36 When using a wire ferrule with insulation sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Insulating sleeve Contact area Insulating sleeve Contact area p crimp area ie crimp area 8mm 2 to 2 5mm 2 6mm 0 31 0 07 to 0 09 10 5 to 12 mm 0 1 o d4Amm 0 41 to 0 47 0 55 Reference FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 6WH CRIMPFOX 6 FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPF OX 6T F FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Tool For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver with straight tip that is not widened toward the end as shown below E Precautions With straight tip If the diameter of the screwdriver tip is too small the required tightening torque cannot be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the 0 4 mm 2 5 mm l l l nEaN 0 01 0 09 previous page use the following screwdriver or its equivalent grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 lt Reference gt Phoenix Contact SZ
133. can be changed with a program or an engineering tool The values can be changed by powering OFF ON or resetting the system Precauions When the latch setting is not set do not change the value with program or engineering tool 2 N N NETWORK 4 2 9 Related Devices 3 44 Number of slave stations setting status Stores the set number of slave stations in the communication settings Use this device to check the number of slave stations set in the master station R Read only Master station Reflects the parameter setting value on each device e Slave stations Reflects the master station setting value on each device Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Nun slave stations setting SD latch setting valid information Turns ON when SD latch setting is set for the total number of local station settings in the communication settings Page 22 SM9081 ON Number of slave stations settings is latched OFF Number of slave stations settings is not latched R Read only Do not change the value with program or engineering tool m Number of slave stations setting NIA peng A 0 us x Stores the set number of slave stations in the serial communication settings gt Page 22 The stored value is the same as number of slave stations setting status SD9041 SD8174 When there is latch setting it is possible to change the number of
134. ch inverter communication instruction 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 122 4 9 Troubleshooting 4 10 Related Devices List of related devices BFX5 only SM8029 Instruction execution Turns ON when execution of instruction is completed and remains R completed ON for 1 scan SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication R SM8920 SM8930 SM8940 SM8950 Inverter communicating Remains ON while inverter communication is being executed SM8921 SM8931 SM8941 SM8951 IVBWR instruction error Turns ON when an IVBWR instruction error occurs A R Read only BFX3 Series compatible SM8063 SM8438 SM8151 SM8156 Inverter communicating Remains ON while inverter communication is being executed SM8152 SM8157 Turns ON when an error occurs in inverter communication Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication Serial communication error V D D D SM8153 SM8158 Inverter communication error Turns ON when an error occurs in inverter communication latch SM8154 SM8159 IVBWR instruction error Turns ON when an IVBWR instruction error occurs R A R Read only BFX5 only SD8500 SD8510 Stores the error code when a serial communication error occurs SD8520 SD8530 Serial communication error code SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Serial communication Stores the setting of the communication parameter settings SD8931 SD8941 SD8951 IVBWR instruction
135. ch is stored If the communication type is receive only 0 is stored If an error occurs during execution of the third protocol 0 is stored If the number of protocols executed is less than 3 O is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed fourth the receive packet number successful in verification match is stored If the communication type is receive only O is stored If an error occurs during execution of the fourth protocol 0 is stored If the number of protocols executed is less than 4 O is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed fifth the receive packet number successful in verification match is stored If the communication type is receive only O is stored If an error occurs during execution of the fifth protocol 0 is stored If the number of protocols executed is less than 5 0 is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed sixth the receive packet number successful in verification match is stored If the communication type is receive only 0 is stored If an error occurs during execution of the sixth protocol 0 is stored If the number of protocols executed is less than 6 O is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed seventh the receive packet number successful in verifica
136. changing any communication setting make sure to turn the PLC power from OFF ON or reset the system Checking absence presence of errors Serial communication error MError flags If a communication error occurs in the predefined protocol support function the serial communication error flag turns ON Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 Serial communication error Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication 200 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 9 Troubleshooting MError codes When the serial communication error turns ON the error code is stored in the corresponding device specified in the table below And be stored in BET T of executed M instruction operand s CH1 SD8500 Name Descri ption d m C communication error When a serial communication error occurs code the error code is stored The error codes hexadecimal stored in devices are shown as follows Error codes Description of error Error handling hexadecimal 7DOOH Protocol No An out of range value is set as the number of protocols to be Check the set protocol No setting error executed continuously which is set by an argument of the S P CPRTCL instruction 7D02H Protocol not e The S P CPRTCL instruction was executed while the Execute the S P CPRTCL instruction while the ready error predefined protocol is not ready SD9102 0 predefined protocol is ready SD9102 1
137. cified in Number of Send Digits of Data are received Ex When Number of Send Digits of Data is set to 4 digits Conversion variable Terminator Receive data An error occurs when conversion variable of the received data ends up with three digits while the setting of Number of Digits of Data is four digits BA data whose number exceeds Maximum number of data is received When receiving data of which the number exceeds the Maximum number of data CPU module stores data as many as the maximum number of data and omits the rest The protocol completes successfully BIA data that cannot be distinguished between Terminator or a Static data In received packet data from counterpart devices CPU module needs to be able to distinguish data corresponding to a conversion variable from those of a Terminator or a Static data following a Conversion variable The reception processing may not be performed normally if they cannot be distinguished When the value of terminator or a static data following the conversion variable is used as a conversion variable CPU module recognizes it as a terminator or a fixed data following the conversion variable verifies and performs reception processing 1 88 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting Check Code Use this element when an element indicating check code data is included in a packet CPU module automatically calculates a specified check code at timing of sending receiving and a
138. col support function in the CPU module using the built in RS 485 port communication board and communication adapter Allotment of serial ports is set to the following fixed numbers regardless of system configuration IBI X5U CPU module BI X5UC CPU module CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH2 Communication board 1 66 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 2 Procedure before Operation Built in RS 485 port CH1 Since it is built into the CPU module there is no need to add 50 m or less equipment Communication FX5 485 BD CH2 Mounted on top of the CPU module there is no change in the 50 mor less board FX5 232 BD installation space requirements 45 micrIBes Communication FX5 485ADP CH3 CH4 Mount the communication adapter to the left of the CPU 1200 m or less adapter FX5 232ADP module 15 m or less 1 Assigned to CH3 or CH4 in order of proximity to CPU module In predefined protocol support function only two channel is available to use for one CPU module 6 4 Specifications This section describes the communication specifications and performance of predefined protocol support function Communication specifications Transmission standard RS 485 and RS 422 standard RS 232C standard Maximum overall distance When F
139. command command X2 X1 d RUN monitor SM400 MOV s1 s2 s3 d1 n d2 IVMC H0000 M200 L MOV Inverter running M100 C Yo gt Forward rotation M101 C D Reverse rotation M102 Alarm occurrence M115 d MOV 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 8 Programming 116 Output frequency speed monitor gt D50 Initial value at startup 60 Hz Write contents to Inverter Operation speed 40 Hz m Transmission data 2 s3 1 Operation speed 20 Hz Operation stop HF9 b1 b2 OFF Operation stop cancel HF9 b1 or b2 ON Forward rotation command HF9 b1 ON Write contents to Inverter Transmission data 1 s3 Reverse rotation command HF9 b2 ON Operation command write The set frequency RAM and run command expansion are written The inverter status monitor expansion and output frequency speed are read Head bit device number of instruction execution status output Communication channel 1 to 4 Head device of destination storing values to be read Head device storing write data Send receive data type specification Inverter station number 0 to 31 Inverter status is read H79 M100 to M115 Read contents from inverter received Status details data 1 d1 as needed Inverter Received Read contents from data 2 d1 1 Second parameter specification code When handling the following parameters in inverter communication it is necessary
140. communication error turns ON the error code is stored in the device specified in the table below SD8500 Stores the error code when the serial communication error occurs v vs v code The following table shows the error code hexadecimal stored in each device 0000H No error detected 714DH Command error 7F40H Monitoring time out TF67H Overrun error 7F68H Framing error 7F69H Parity error 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 8 Troubleshooting When an error code above is stored check the following items Parity overrun or framing error The transfer data is abnormal Check the transfer specifications set using parameters and execute communication again Command error When the station number was FFH any command Modify the specified command to execute the other than GW was received communication again Monitoring time out The received message was insufficient Because The message is insufficient Modify the transfer normal message was not received within the time program in the counterpart equipment to execute out time setting the transfer sequence was the communication again initialized The serial communication error flags and serial communication error codes are not cleared even when communication is restored They are cleared when turning OFF ON the PLC power or resetting the system 3 9 Related Devices List of related devices SM8500 SM8740 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 Turns ON when an error occurs in s
141. communication will not function correctly I Page 136 Communication Settings After changing any communication setting make sure to turn the PLC power from OFF ON or reset the system Caution on write during RUN when RS2 instruction is driven When the RS2 instruction is eliminated by writing during RUN non protocol communication stops immediately Checking absence presence of errors rial communication error lBlError flags If a communication error occurs in the non protocol communication the serial communication error flag turns ON Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 SM8063 SM8438 154 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 8 Troubleshooting MError codes When the serial communication error turns ON the error code is stored in the corresponding device specified in the table below SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 SD8063 SD8438 code The error codes hexadecimal stored in devices are shown as follows Parity error overrun error or framing A parity error overrun error or framing error occurred during error communication Communication data sum mismatch Receive data sum mismatch Incorrect data format Incorrect data format Character other than LF was received after CR in control procedure CR
142. data SD9230 SD9240 SD9250 SD9260 Send receive data monitoring Page 209 function setting The monitoring function can be stopped or started The monitor function status is displayed after monitoring is started SD9231 SD9241 SD9251 SD9261 Send receive Data area full Monitoring stops automatically when the number of monitor Page 210 data monitoring stop data size is larger than the specified one function option specification setting 1 packet stop Monitoring stops automatically after one send packet or specification receive packet is monitored SD9232 SD9242 SD9252 SD9262 Monitoring data device Specify a type of word device used as the monitor data Page 210 specification area SD9233 SD9243 SD9253 SD9263 Monitoring data start device No Specify a start device number of word devices used as the Page 210 specification monitor data area SD9234 SD9244 SD9254 SD9264 Monitoring data size specification Specify the size of word devices used as the monitor data Page 211 area in word unit 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 8 Programming 95 Monitor start When 0001H is set for send receive data monitoring function setting the device number of monitoring data and the number of monitor data are initialized and monitoring is started When monitoring is started monitoring 0002H is written to send receive data monitoring function setting Monitoring After monitoring is
143. data code Binary ASCII The maximum data length that can be 2048 byte sent received at one time Communication type With the predefined protocol support function communications with counterpart devices are performed using the following procedures communication types Send Only Sends a send packet once One send packet is required Receive Only Receives a packet if it matches any of up to 16 defined receive packets One or more receive packets are required Send amp Receive Sends a send packet and then receives a packet if it matches any of up to 16 defined receive packets One send packet and one or more receive packets are required For the operation of each communication type refer to L gt Page 213 Operation image of each communication type Packet A send packet to the counterpart devices and a receive packet from the counterpart devices at the time of process execution are registered in a protocol The packet elements which are set to the Predefined protocol support function is applied to the actual data portion of the packet to be transmitted For details of packet elements refer to L Page 176 Packet Setting Ex Example of a packet configuration Data area Maximum data length 2048 bytes 6 5 Communication Settings For the FX5 Series communication settings of this function parameters are set using GX Works3 For details about GX Works3 refer to LLLIGX Works3 Operating Manual Setting of parameter differ
144. dds it to a send packet or detects an error of a receive packet Element Name Sum Check sum Check E ASCII Hexadecimal v Processing Method Code Type Data Length Data Flow Complement Calculation Calculating Range Start Calculating Range End Element Name Processing Method Select a calculating method Horizontal Parity e Sum Check 16 bit CRC for MODBUS ASCII Hexadecimal ASCII Decimal e HEX Code Type When Select a format in which a calculated check code is sent sending When Select a format in which data are received receiving Select the data length on the line byte The range is 1 to 4 When Sends a calculated check code from the lower byte sending When Handles received data as a check code from the upper receiving byte When Sends a calculated check code from the lower byte sending When Receives data from the lower byte receiving When Sends a calculated check code by swapping the upper sending byte and lower byte by word When Receives data by swapping the upper byte and lower receiving byte by word and handles as a check code Data Length Forward Direction Upper Byte Lower Byte Data Flow Reverse Direction Lower Byte Upper Byte Byte Swap by Word Complement Calculation Select the complement calculation No Complement Calculation One s Complement Two s Complement Calculating Start Select the starting elem
145. device is read to YO11 M4002 The information from M4002 link device is read to M15 MOV KAM4010 K4Y20 The information from M4010 to M4025 link devices is read to Y20 to Y37 MOV D1000 D10 The information from D1000 link device is read to Data transfer D10 sequence error in slave station No 2 SM9042 M4128 The information from M4128 link device is read to M1 M4129 The information from M4129 link device is read to Y012 M4130 The information from M4130 link device is read to M18 The information from M4140 to M4155 link Moy ania Bed devices is read to M20 to M35 MOV D1020 D20 The information from M4140 to M4155 link devices is read to M20 to M35 For details on the link devices refer to K Page 25 Contents of related devices For cautions on program creation refer to K Page 32 Cautions on program creation Cautions on program creation e When N N Network is used the operation cycle in each PLC becomes longer by about 10 per station e Set station numbers consecutively If a station number that is used twice or more or is skipped link will not be achieved normally Do not change the contents of link devices at other stations When a link error data transfer sequence error occurs the link device information is held in the status just before occurrence of the link error Create program to operate safely when an error occurs Link device update in N N Network is executed by interru
146. devices of error code are as follows When a error occurs refer to the error code list shown below to confirm the check points 2221H The parameter read from file is incorrect Parameter setting by GX Works3 7701H Send monitoring L Slave station did not respond to the request from the master Wiring timeout in slave station within the monitoring time Power station 7702H Station number L An unexpected slave station responded to the request by the Station number settings error master station 7703H Counter error L The counter value included in the parameter data is different from Wiring the counter value given by a slave station 7705H Insuffucient device points for slave stations error 7711H Send monitoring The master station did not send request to the next slave station Wiring timeout in master within the monitoring timer Power stationt 7704H Message format The message given by the slave station is incorrect Wiring error in slave Power station Station number settings M L The link device point number corresponding to the number of Number of slave stations slave stations cannot be secured Station number settings Link device head number 2 N N NETWORK 2 8 Troubleshooting SM9047 SM8190 SD9068 D8218 35 36 Wiring Power Station number settings Message format The message from the master station is incorrect error in master s
147. e Different name for FX5 1PSU 5V Different name for FX3U 1PSU 5V The abbreviation for intelligent function modules Generic term for FX5 intelligent function modules and FX3 intelligent function modules Generic term for FX5 intelligent function modules Generic term for FX3 special function blocks Different name for FX5 40SSC S Generic term for board for FX5U CPU module Generic term for FX5 232 BD FX5 485 BD and FX5 422 BD GOT Generic term for adapter for FX5 CPU module Generic term for FX5 232ADP and FX5 485ADP Generic term for FX5 4AD ADP and FX5 4DA ADP Generic term for Bus conversion module extension cable type and Bus conversion module extension connector type Different name for FX5 CNV BUS Different name for FX5 CNV BUSC Different name for FX3U 32BL Generic term for engineering tools and GOTs Generic term for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 and GOT2000 series 11 12 Terms MSoftware packages Engineering tool GX Works3 Manuals User s manual User s manual Startup e FX5 User s manual Hardware FX5U User s manual Hardware e FX5UC User s manual Hardware User s manual Application Programming manual Program Design Programming manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Communication manual Serial communication manual MODBUS communication manual Ethernet communication manual SLMP manual Positioning manual Analog manual ll Communication
148. e AWG 14 2 mm or larger e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible Other equipment O 5 6 Communication Settings For the FX5 communication settings of this function parameters are set using GX Works3 For details about GX Works3 refer to LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual Setting of parameter differs according to the module used The procedure for each module is as follows Built in RS 485 port CH1 TZ Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt 485 Serial Port Window The following screen will be displayed if Non protocol Communication is set for the communication protocol type llBasic Settings E Communication Prataca Type QC Tet dete er Der cos 2 Communication Protocol Type Mon protacal Communication E Advanced Settings aet detailed setting Data Length ibit Parity Bit Odd Stop Bit Ibit Baud Rate d B bps Header Not Added Header Setting Value 02000000 Terminator Mat Added Terminator Setting Value QS000000 Control Mode RS 2820 No Control Line Control Mode RS 485 Half Duplex Bi directional Communication Sum Check Code Not Added Control Procedure Format 1 CR LF Nat Added lBlFixed Setting E A A Process Mode Miam g gee a B bit Process Mode 16bit Mode E Time out Period Set time out period Time out Period 10 ms 136 5 NON PROT
149. e N N Network ER These devices are used for determining errors in the N N Network Use these devices to output the link errors or use them in interlock sequence programs SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 SM8063 SM8438 Turns ON when serial communication error occurred SM9040 SM8183 Data transfer sequence error Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error occurred in the master station SM9041 to SM9047 SM8184 to SM8190 2 Data transfer sequence error Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error occurred in the other slave stations However data sequence errors that occurred in the local station slave station cannot be detected SM9056 SM8191 Data transfer sequence ON Remains ON while the N N Network is operating 1 Station number 1 SM9041 station number 2 SM9042 station number 3 SM9043 station number 7 SM9047 2 Station number 1 SM8184 station number 2 SM8185 station number 3 SM8186 station number 7 SM8190 2 N N NETWORK 2 2 Programming 9 26 The devices are assigned according to the set pattern in the the refresh range setting as the following set device number All stations bit device M 4000 word device D 1000 set at the head Page 17 Link specifications llPattern 0 D1000 to D1003 D1010 to D1013 D1020 to D1023 D1030 to D1033 D1040 to D1043 D1070 to D1073 Word devices 4 points for each station llPattern 1
150. e PLC starts to send When sending of the data is completed the sending request flag is automatically reset SM8561 R W Read Write Precautions When setting these devices to ON set the drive condition with a pulse SM8562 SM8572 SM8582 SM8592 These devices turn ON when serial communication data receiving is complete R W Read Write Receiving is completed in one of the following three conditions e When the PLC receives the amount of receive data specified by the RS2 instruction When the terminators are set and the PLC receives the code set by the terminator e When data receiving is suspended and the PLC does not receive the next set of data within the time set by the time out time setting device When the receiving completed flag turns ON transfer the received data to another storage destination and then set this flag to OFF When this flag is set to OFF the PLC waits to receive When the RS2 instruction is driven while the amount of receive data is set to O the PLC does not wait to receive To make the PLC wait to receive it is necessary to set the amount of receive data to 1 or more and set the receiving completed flag ON OFF 158 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 9 Related Devices These devices turn ON OFF in synchronization with the CD DCD signal SM8573 SM8583 SM8593 SM8404 SM8424 R Read only SM8563 When the CD DCD signal of the counterpart device that i
151. e Set NOR RD Data 4 Digits Data Variable Set Engineering tool CPU module Serial ERR NAK Response Variable Set 3 wrsusseriecrmc rmeoorsenes HFEWR Operation ode Sees 4 ACK ACK Response Variable Set ERR NAK Response Variable Set MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FREQROL Series H6F RD Out Frequency Speed Send amp Receive 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 1 Function Summary 65 6 2 Procedure before Operation The flow chart below shows the Predefined Protocol Support Function setting and sequence program creation procedure up until communication with a counterpart device 1 Check communication specifications K Refer to Page 167 Specifications Communication specifications Predefined protocol specifications 2 System configuration and selection K Refer to Page 166 System Configuration System Configuration Select communication equipment 3 Wiring Refer to non protocol communication Page 131 Wiring Selection of cables and connection equipment Wiring example 4 Communication settings K Refer to Page 168 Communication Settings 5 Protocol settings K Refer to Page 170 Protocol Setting K Refer to Page 176 Packet Setting 6 Program creation K Refer to Page 191 Programming Detailed explanation of related devices Basic program 6 3 System Configuration This section outlines the system configuration required to use predefined protocol support function You can use the predefined proto
152. e exchanged at the time Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify error of random reading writing are exceeded and specified it if necessary and then execute communication again 7E42H Data count error The number of points requested are exceeding the range Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify for the command it if necessary and then execute communication again 7E43H Device error Non existing device is specified Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify A device that cannot be specified in the pertinent it if necessary and then execute communication again command is specified 7F21H Receiving There is a specification error in the command frame Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify header part part it if necessary and then execute communication again error An ASCII code that cannot be converted to binary code is received 7F22H Command error There is an error in the remote password length Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify it if necessary and then execute communication again 7F23H MC protocol There is no data ETX CR LF etc at the end of Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify message error character part or there is an error in the specification it if necessary and then execute communication again 3 MC PROTOCOL 63 3 8 Troubleshooting 64 7F24H The received s
153. ed Off Off The data is not being sent or received When normally sending or receiving by MC protocol both LEDs start flashing brightly If they do not flash check the wiring and the communication settings Checking installation and wiring Connection status The communication cannot be operated if the PLC and the communication board communication adapter are not connected correctly For the connection procedure refer to the following FX5U User s manual Hardware FX5SUC User s manual Hardware Wiring Verify that all communication equipment is correctly wired Page 52 Wiring 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 8 Troubleshooting Checking sequence program An error may occur when a serial port using MC protocol is specified in a command that will be used in inverter communication non protocol communication or predefined protocol support function 1 gt Page 212 Combined Use of Serial Communication Checking the communication setting Verify that protocol type is MC Protocol When the protocol type is not MC Protocol communication will not function correctly Page 57 Communication Setting After changing any parameters make sure to turn OFF ON the PLC power or reset the system Checking error codes 3C 4C frame WError codes when NAK is sent The table below shows error codes hexadecimal and contents of errors when NAK is sent in communication between the counterpart equipment and a CPU mod
154. ed Setting Type Version Explanation Packet Setting Configuration Element Name 3 Click Execute to execute writing oe Precautions The written protocol setting data is reflected when the power is turned on or the CPU module is reset Point e The protocol setting data is written to module extended parameter UEX3FF01 PPR e When using protocol setting data written to SD memory card set the protocol setting data transferred to the CPU built in memory by boot operation For details refer to LLL 1User s manual Application Reading protocol setting data Read the protocol setting data on the screen displayed by the following operation 4 Online gt Module Read Window ModueRead ES The procedure to read the data is as follows Target Module Selection 1 Select a CPU module from which the protocol setting Module Selection data is read from Module Selection Only the CPU module specified in specify connection destination Target Memory cpu Built in Memory connection of GX Works3 can be specified 2 Select the memory to which the protocol setting data is When reading data from target memory the following information is not displayed However data of the protocols selected from the predefined protocol libraries is displayed 3 Click Execute to execute reading Non displayed Data Manufacturer Packet Name Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation Packet Setting Element Name
155. ee eres 166 6 4 SDeciliCalloliS oodoes cene soie PRI ERE eee et eS PIRE ISUeEMPIeGESSs LIS EE SS 167 Communication specifications aa aaea ea hrs 167 Predefined protocol specifications eaaa 167 o qiiraiigezilo nea do PE 168 xc c TC 7v r M A 168 6 5 Communication Settings 44 0255 4 desk ch 3x GG tan cee ONE DOS X X tee teehee eee eee du 168 6 6 Protocol Setting 5 42 yas hex ho aa d ee Ve OR RR CROCO ae OC C RA Ca 170 Second parameter specification Code llle err 117 nisielqeBoorero T ease aeons dois ae bea ee bea eee seen oe E ee 171 Configuring detailed setting of protocols 0 0 ee eee eee eens 172 Operations for protocol setting data 0 0 ne eee eee eens 174 6 7 Packet SCuing qr tesserae denne soy deed Meee eee he bee hale oe eee 176 no a5 soe ew eae E E ee ee ee ee ie ee eo ee ee be ee eee 177 Haus P C c 178 Eres Pe Ccc r 179 cucNQP mE 180 Non conversion Variable cceli hh 181 Conversion Variable 0 0 0c hh hh sas 184 Ceo Code novo c eee eee E eee soe erred ea eee Se ever deed ss ee ESL ENSEM SEE MS 189 Non verified reception soa os en m EE RR ORA nen ke 2 YR EXC RUE ERE Oe RA ERE A eee 190 6 8 Prorom uus vidi ida Eod Ea Ad abd SR uci acne a ae Bee esas eee Bogart add opui tot
156. eflects the master station setting value on each device Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Stores the set monitoring time in the communication settings Page 22 SD9084 SD8180 50 to 2550 ms R R Read only Master station Reflects the parameter setting value on each device Slave stations After the communication is started reflects the master station setting value on each device Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices 45 46 This device stores the current value of the network cycle in the N N Network SD9043 SD8201 0 to 32767 x10 ms R R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool This device stores the maximum value of the network cycle in the N N Network SD9044 SD8202 0 to 32767 x10 ms R R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool These devices store the number of data transfer sequence errors that occurred in the master station and slave stations FX5 only SD9045 SD9046 SD9047 SD9048 SD9049 SD9050 SD9051 SD9052 FX3 Series compatible SD8203 SD8204 SD8205 SD8206 SD8207 SD8208 SD8209 SD8210 R Read only Precaulons Data transfer sequence errors in a station itself cannot be detected Do not change the value with program or enginee
157. election Pr 73 IVRD K903 D102 M220 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency D102 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain IVRD K6 K1903 D103 K1 M230 D103 The unit is specified by Analog Instruction execution input selection Pr 73 completed flag SM8029 wow 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 108 4 8 Programming Inverter parameter write This instruction writes a value from the PLC to a parameter in an inverter For information concerning inverter communication instruction expressions and execution format refer to LLJProgramming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks ENO IVWR EN s1 s2 s3 n d Setting data Contents range data type s1 Inverter station number KO to 31 16 bit signed binary ANY16 s2 Inverter parameter number Refer to L gt Page 72 16 bit signed binary ANY 16 s3 Set value to be written to the inverter parameter or device 16 bit signed binary ANY16 number storing the data to be set n Used channel K1to4 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16 U d Bit device head number to which instruction execution status is Bit ANYBIT ARRAY output Number of elements 3 1 Specify a channel No for which communication setting is set for inverter communication 2 Make sure not to use devices being used in other control operations Page 98 BApplicable devices et OM jo r o Oo m fe b e e ebk o X Jo biki e o9
158. en an error occurs in IVBWR R instruction R Read only When an IVBWR instruction error is ON the parameter number that could not be set is stored in the following corresponding devices SD8921 IVBWR instruction error parameter number Stores the parameter number which was not written by IVBWR instruction SD8931 SD8941 SD8951 SD8154 SD8159 Do not turn ON OFF by program or engineering tool IVBWR communication errors are not cleared even after communication is restored to normal state Devices are cleared when power is turned OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 12 4 10 Related Devices 5 SD8500 R Read only Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Serial communication error codes are not cleared even after communication is restored to normal state Devices are cleared when power is turned OFF gt ON STOP RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON Stores the communication parameters set in the communication settings when PLC power is turned OFF ON STOPRUN PAUSE RUN or system is reset L Page 95 SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Stores the setting of the communication parameter R Read only The descriptions of the communication parameters are as follows b1 Parity bit b2 b1 b2 0 0 Not provided 0 1 Odd 1 1 Even b4 Baud rate b7
159. en the data is stored for the size of the monitor data area At this time monitoring stop 1002H is written to send receive data monitoring function setting The type of packets for which monitoring starts or stops differs depending on the communication type of protocols Communication type Stop requirement Send Only Monitoring stops when one send packet is monitored 1 Receive Only Monitoring stops when one receive packet is monitored Send amp Receive Monitoring stops when one send packet and one receive packet are monitored 1 Ifthe size of one packet exceeds the size of the monitor data area monitoring stops when the data for size of the monitor data area is stored llMonitor data The data stored in the monitor data area is as follows ex Monitoring data device specification D device 0 Monitoring data start device No specification 0 Monitoring data size specification 100 DO 0032H Monitor data device No Number of the device in which the oldest data is stored The oldest data is D50 0032H 50 D1 0064H Number of monitor data Number of monitor data stored in the monitor data area Number of monitor data is 100 OO64H 100 D2 1000H Monitor data 1 Monitor data area Send data 00H D3 1001H Monitor data 2 D4 1002H Monitor data 3 D9 1003H Monitor data 98 D100 1004H Monitor data 99 D101 1005H Monitor data 100 Send data 01H Send data 02H ce Send data 03H Send data 04H Send data 05H 1 96 6 PREDEFINE
160. en to an EE 16 bit signed binary ANY16 inverter n Used channel K1 to 4 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16 U d 2 Head bit device number to which instruction execution status is Bit ANYBIT ARRAY output Number of elements 3 1 Specify a channel No for which communication setting is set for inverter communication 2 Make sure not to use devices being used in other control operations Page 98 BApplicable devices en J o o bere j o eene en jJo X o Jo j fo po Fiki ea J j bE J o e o f Q E e CS Fe d gt 7 e S fe OM fe o e 7 1 LST and C cannot be used 2 Bit specification of word device cannot be used 3 Nibble specification of bit device cannot be used 4 Only bit specification of word device can be used 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 111 4 8 Programming Ex Writing contents in case of s2 K8 s3 D200 D200 Parameter No 1 s3 1 D201 Parameter 1 value s3 2 D202 Parameter No 2 s3 3 D203 Parameter 2 value s313 D203 _ s2 x2 Number of occupied word devices s3 14 D214 Parameter No 8 s3 15 D215 Parameter 8 value Continuously writes parameter numbers and their values 2 words parameter for the number of points specified by s2 starting from word device specified by s3 for station No s1 of inverter connected to communication channel n no limit to number of points that can be written Operationerror
161. ent number of the calculating range Range The range is 1 to 32 End Select the ending element number of the calculating range The range is 1 to 32 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting Set the name of the element For calculation procedure refer to following Is Page 225 KL Page 227 K Page 229 Not settable when Processing Method is 16 bit CRC for MODBUS Not settable when Processing Method is 16 bit CRC for MODBUS Not settable when Processing Method is 16 bit CRC for MODBUS or when the Data Length is set to 1 byte Not settable when Processing Method is 16 bit CRC for MODBUS or when the Data Length is set to 1 to 3 byte Not settable when Processing Method is 16 bit CRC for MODBUS Refer to k Page 230 189 Considerations for configuring packet element Only one check code can be placed in a packet A check code can be placed in any position of the data portion or after a terminator However one or more elements are needed before the check code Caution e When Code Type is ASCII Hexadecimal an error may occur if a string other than 0 to 9 A to F a to T is received e When Code Type is ASCII Decimal an error may occur of characters if a string other than O to 9 is received e When a calculated check code Sum check Horizontal parity 16 bit CRC does not match a received check code a error may occur Non verified rec
162. eption Use this element when received data includes unnecessary data while receiving data CPU module skips the specified number of characters if a receive packet includes a non verified reception For data examples of non verified reception refer to Page 231 Data examples of Non verified reception Window Element Setting Non verified Reception Receive Element Name Data Length Oo Setting Range 0 to 2048 0 Variable oa Item Description Element Name Set the name of the element Data Length 0 variable number of characters Set this item when the number of characters not to be verified varies in each communication 1 to 2048 specified number of characters Set the number of characters not to be verified Considerations for configuring packet element When Data Length is 1 to 2048 the following requirements need to be met Multiple Non verified receptions can be used in a packet and placed in any position of the data portion lBWhen Data Length is 0 the following requirements need to be met Only one Non verified reception can be placed in a packet and one of the following requirements need to be met Place any of the following data immediately after a Non verified reception Static data Terminator Check code Static data Check code Terminator Place length before a non verified reception and include the non verified reception in the calculating range In addition two or more of the followi
163. er Data transfer Data transfer Interval time llData transfer time R Number of read data points W Number of written data points T Time to send or receive one character V Interval time S Max Scan Time of PLC D Message waiting time 1 3C Frame Time to read continuous word devices data registers etc in one station ms 43 Ax R x T ms V S SD524 x3 D Time to write continuous word devices data registers etc in one station ms 42 4 x W x T ms V S SD524 x 34 D 1 This is the number of characters when format is used and the sum check is not provided at the time of execution of batch read write command When format4 is used add 4 to this value Further when the sum check is provided add 4 to this value also Further when specifying an extension add 7 to this value also 2 The number of points is counted in 1 word units 2 4C Frame In case of ASCII code When format1 to format4 are used Time to read continuous word devices data registers etc in one station ms 49 4 x R x T ms V S SD524 x3 D Time to write continuous word devices data registers etc in one station ms 48 4 x W x T ms V S SD524 x3 D 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 4 Specifications 3 This is the number of characters when format1 is used and the sum check is not provided at the time of execution of batch read write command When format4 is used add 4 to this value Further when t
164. er Byte gt Lower Byte Calculating Range Start Calculating Range End oa Element Name Set the name of the element Code Type Select a format of the data length ASCII Hexadecimal ASCII Decimal HEX Data Length Select the data length on the line The range is 1 to 4 Data Flow Forward Direction When Sends a calculated length from the upper byte Data flow setting is Upper Byte Lower Byte sending invalid when data length is 1 byte When receiving When sending When receiving Receives data from the upper byte Reverse Direction Sends a calculated length from the lower byte Lower Byte Upper Byte Receives data from the lower byte Byte Swap When Sends a calculated length swapping the upper byte and Data flow setting is by Word sending lower byte by word invalid when data length When Receives data swapping the upper byte and lower byte is 1 to 3 byte receiving by word Calculating Start Select the start packet element numbers for the calculating range Refer to K Page 219 Range The range is 1 to 32 End Select the last packet element numbers for the calculating range The range is 1 to 32 Considerations for configuring packet element Only one terminator can be used in a packet To configure the length one or more other elements are needed 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 7 Packet Setting 79 Caution e When the number of digits of calculation result i
165. er to LAthe inverter manual for each respective series Inverter built in P N000 P N001 P N030 to P N038 P D000 P D001 P D010 P DO11 A700 Series RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 342 Pr 549 E700 Series Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 549 Page 93 E700EX Series D700 Series V500 Series A800 Series RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Page 90 U U c c o o o o m a U U U CIC GC Oo o o ojojo 4 2 4 If these parameters are overwritten by the PLC after the inverter is connected communication will be disabled If these parameters are changed by mistake they should be set again FREQROL A800 series b Connection destination Built in RS 485 terminal nts of communication setting essential items The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases 331 NO30 Up to 16 inverters can be connected 332 N031 RS 485 communication speed 4800 bps 9 9600 bps 19200 bps 384 38400 bps 576 57600 bps 1152 115200 bps N032 RS 485 communication data length 1 Data length 7 bits NO033 RS 485 communication stop bit length Stop bit 1 bit RS 485 communication stop bit length 10 Data length 7 bits data length Stop bit 1 bit 334 N034 RS 485 communication parity check 2 Even selection 337 N037 RS 485 communication waiting time 9999 Set in communication data setting 341 NO038 RS 485 communication CR LF 1 CR Provided LF Not provided selection 549 NOOO Pro
166. er which is specified on the element setting screen 1 is considered as the data storage area o Specified device Number of data Send packet Stores the send number of data storage area Receive packet Stores the receive number of data 1 Send packet Stores the transmit data Data storage area Receive packet Stores the receive data n llOccupied size in data storage area The size occupied in the data storage area varies depending on the settings of Conversion Unit and Number of Decimals Word No Decimal point Fixed point 1 word Variable point 2 words 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 8 6 7 Packet Setting o Double Word No Decimal point Fixed point 2 words Variable point 4 words llData storage area configuration per one data The following shows the data storage area configuration per one data Case of Conversion Unit is Word For Variable Point the decimal point position is set in the data storage area Data storage area Data storage area Decimal point position In the decimal point position area the decimal point position is set as follows 12345 12345 3039H 1 1H 1234 5 12345 3039H 10 OAH 123 45 12345 3039H 100 64H 12 345 12345 3039H 1000 3E8H 1 2345 12345 3039H 10000 2710H Case of Conversion Unit is Double word For Variable Point the decimal point position is set in the data storage area Data storage area Data storage area Numeric data Numeric d
167. erial communication SM8750 SM8760 SM8770 Station number setting latch Turns ON when the SD latch setting of station number setting is setting valid flag valid ON SD latch setting of station number setting is valid OFF SD latch setting of station number setting is invalid R Read only SD8500 SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 Stores the error code when a serial communication error R code occurs SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Serial communication settings Stores the setting of the communication parameter R SD8740 SD8750 SD8760 SD8770 Station number settings Sets the station number of a PLC SD8741 SD8751 SD8761 SD8771 Message system Stores the setting of the message system R SD8742 SD8752 SD8762 SD8772 Time out time setting These devices set the evaluation time for error when receiving R of data from the counterpart equipment is interrupted SD8503 SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 Serial communication Stores the communication type being used R operation mode R Read only 1 When SD latch setting is set to latch device value can be changed in the program or an engineering tool and by turning power supply ON OFF or by system reset the corresponding function can be operated with the changed value 2 With latch settings Read write No latch settings Read only 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 9 Related Devices 66 Details of related devices The devices described below are used in MC protocol 1unication error Turns ON when an err
168. error Stores a parameter number in which an IVBWR instruction error has parameter number occurred SD8991 SD9001 SD9011 Response wait time Stores the communication response wait time SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 Serial communication Stores the communication type being used operation mode R Read only SD8502 SD8921 SD8981 SD8503 BFX3 Series compatible SD8063 SD8438 Serial communication error Stores the error code when a serial communication error occurs R code D8152 SD8157 Inverter communication error Stores the error code when an inverter communication error occurs R code SD8154 SD8159 IVBWR instruction error Stores a parameter number in which an IVBWR instruction error has R parameter number occurred SD8419 SD8439 Serial communication Stores status of the current communication being executed R operation mode R Read only 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 12 4 10 Related Devices 3 Details of related devices The following devices are used in inverter communications FX3 Series compatible devices operate only on channels specified in SM SD settings Turns ON when the execution of inverter communication instruction is completed and remains ON for 1 scan When an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction remains ON for 1 scan in the same way SM8029 When execution of instruction is completed turns ON for 1 scan R Read only Precautions Do not t
169. es in those areas are overwritten with new values 21 0 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 10 Related Devices Monitoring data size specification The size of word devices used as the monitor data areas with the send receive data monitoring function is stored in word units For details refer to Page 196 Monitor data 2 gt H SD9244 SD9254 SD9264 0 to 32765 SD9234 W Write only Precautions When a device value is changed after the send receive data monitoring has been started the change is not reflected When monitoring is started after the receive data monitoring was stopped including a stop due to a receive error the change is reflected When the storage destinations of monitor data overlap for each channel no error occurs and the values in those areas are overwritten with new values 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 21 1 6 10 Related Devices APPENDIX Appendix 1 Combined Use of Serial Communication Channel specification The same serial port cannot be used for more than one communication function Duplicate channel numbers cannot be specified in communication settings but an error may still result if channel numbers for communications functions other than the designated function are specified in the following commands Inverter communication Non protocol communication Predefined protocol support function IVCK IVDR IVRD IVWR IVBWR IVMC instruction RS2 i
170. essional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Mitsubishi Electric will not accept responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples Please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system The content specification etc of this manual may be changed for improvement without notice The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you notice a doubtful point an error etc please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative MEMO CONTENTS SAFET PRECAUTIONS 2224x222 c keuse 835 20x23 9929 EUNT oe eee ee ee eee eee ee d e EE ds 1 INTRODUCTION EMFEMTPE DL r 4 RELEVANT MANUALS 2a dera hear E da RUPEE EE PERSE NEN Cees due RE eae ee BE dida des bn rt 10 TERM m r 11 CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE 13 CHAPTER2 N N NETWORK 14 2 1 Outline OF Lg crins niara eraann nr nn E a a 14 2 2 Procedures before Operation 45s sek Rr ROSE RE ERE LEER EE Eu ROSEO EE RE E REFER 15 2 3 System Configuration csser sasa Poe kar a arb CR DE aed US Robo AE E VUE Ha Rui qae E sane ee bare 6a 15 2 4 DHCCIICAUONS RNC ETE TEECTTIOTOTTO TETTE LITT ITI 16 Communication specifications llle hrs 16 Linc SPeCINCAUON Ss anck
171. eve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Insulating sleeve Contact area Insulating sleeve Contact area crimp area crimp area 8 mm 2 to 2 5 mm 0 435 Jemm 0 31 0 07 to 0 09 10 5 to 12 mm 0 1 14mm _ 0 41 to 0 47 0 55 lt Reference gt FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 6WH CRIMPFOX 6 FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX 6T F FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 132 5 5 Wiring Tool For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver with straight tip that is not widened toward the end as shown below B Precautions With straight tip If the diameter of the screwdriver tip is too small the required tightening torque cannot be achieved To achieve the appropriate tightening torque shown in the 0 4 mm T I 2 5 mm 0 01 0 09 previous page use the following screwdriver or its equivalent grip diameter approximately 25 mm 0 98 lt Reference gt Phoenix Contact Termination resistor setting Make sure to provide a termination resistor at both ends of the wire The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have a built in termination resistor Set the termination resistor selector switch as below Two pair wiring One pair wiring
172. ever when the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of OOH added When Lower Bytes Only is selected twice the size of the data length is occupied Ge Specified device 0 Data storaae area Send packet Stores the transmit data o Receive packet Stores the receive data n When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length An area starting from the device number which is specified on the Element Setting screen 1 is considered as the data storage area The data storage area to be occupied varies depending on the setting of Unit of Stored Data When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length one word length for the data length storage area are occupied However when the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not transmitted When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number one byte of 00H is added to the last data and stored e When Lower Bytes Only is selected twice the size of the data length one word length for the data length storage area are occupied s Specified device 0 Data length Send packet Stores the send data length data length on the line storage area Receive packet Stores the receive data length data leng
173. evice is for checking the setting status of station number of the local station SD9040 SD8173 0 Master station 1 to 7 Slave station Reflects the parameter setting value on each device R Read only e Master station e Slave stations Reflects the master station setting value on each device Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool n number settings SD latch setting valid information uis Turns ON when SD latch setting is set for the station number settings in the communication settings Page 22 ON Station number settings is latched OFF Station number settings is not latched SM9080 R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Stores the set station number i in n the communication settings Page 22 The stored value is the same as station number settings status SD9040 SD8173 When the latch setting is set the station number can be changed with the program 0 Master station R 1 to 7 Slave station SD9080 R Read only 1 When the latch setting is set read write is possible Master station The parameter setting value is reflected also to the station number settings status SD9040 SD8173 e Slave stations The parameter setting value is reflected also to the station number settings status SD9040 SD8173 When the latch setting is set to SD9080 value
174. exchange number of the Programmable Controller ee Station Number 0 E Message Pattem Set the pattern of the MC Protocol biography sentence ies Message Pattern Pattern E Time out Period Set time out period oe Time out Period 10 ms BSM SD Setting E hated Setting Set the latch of SM SD device seen Advanced Settings Do Mot Latch en Station Number Do Mat Latch Message Pattern Do Mat Latch Lore Time out Period Do Mat Latch FX3 Series Compatibility TheSM SD device of FX3 series compatibility i SMSO for Compatible Disable 3 MC PROTOCOL 7 3 6 Communication Setting 9 58 Communication board CH2 X Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt Extended Board The following screen will be displayed if FX5 232 BD or FX5 485 BD is set for the extended board and MC Protocol is set for the communication protocol type Fixed setting and SM SD setting are the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 llBasic Settings E Extended Board Set the extended board type 2 Extended Board FX5 485 BD E Communication Protocol Type Setcommunication protocol type m Communication Protocol Type MC Protocal H Advanced Settings Set detailed setting Data Length bit Parity Bit Odd Stop Bit Ibit Baud Rate 9 600bps Sum Check Code Not Added Communication adapter CH3 CH4 When an expansion adapter is used add expansion adapter to Module Information X Navigation window gt
175. f Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for railway companies or public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation e
176. f data and variable number of digits Conversion variable Excluding the case where Number of Send Data is 1 and Delimiter is not No delimiter Variable length Non conversion variable e Variable number of characters Non verified reception Caution When receiving variable length data whose length exceeds the Maximum data length CPU module stores data as long as the maximum data length and omits the rest The protocol completes successfully Out of packet data received from counterpart devices the data corresponding to variable needs to be distinguishable from a terminator or a static data immediately after non conversion variable The reception processing may not be performed normally if it cannot distinguished Ex When value of a terminator or value of a static data following a non conversion variable is used in a non conversion variable CPU module recognizes it as data of a terminator or a static data following a non conversion variable and performs the verification reception processing 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 7 Packet Setting 83 Conversion Variable This element converts the numerical data in the value of device to an ASCII string and sends it or converts the received data ASCII string to numerical data and stores it to the device When a variable element that is dependent on the system exists during packet formatting use this function For data examples of conversion variable refer to L Page 2
177. f instructions and communication 1 Driving instructions at the same time Two or more inverter communication instructions can be programmed and driven at the same time When two or more instructions are driven at the same time for the serial port used for communication the next inverter communication instruction in the program is executed after the current communication with the inverter has finished RUN monitor SM400 vom on ea we wee Ho M100 SM8920 ON OFF 2 ON gt OFF M110 SM8920 ON OFF fe l le H s 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 98 4 8 Programming 1 Inverter communication instructions standby for 11 ms after acquiring a communication port and then starts communication Even if the drive contact turns ON the inverter communication instruction stands by until 8M8920 turns ON gt OFF when the SM8920 inverter communication busy flag has been turned ON by other inverter communication instruction The PLC frees the communication port and then executes inverter communication instructions driven in the next step and so on MO M IVWR instruction during communication M1 f i a during communication m f 2 Inverter communicating i N AL A SM8920 IVWR r3 Instruction execution complete flag i SM8029 IVWR instruction execution E mU flag i M100 IVWR instruction m normal end flag M101 IVCK instruction execution flag M110 IVCK instruction normal end
178. f the FX5 specifies communication execution state in operand d or d2 Bit device 3 bit occupied outputs according to state of inverter communication instruction execution in progress normal completion error completion the state can be confirmed from specified bit device The operations of the specified bit devices 3 bit occupied and data that can be handled simultaneously are as follows The following device is not dedicated to a single inverter communication instruction but is rather shared with other inverter communication instructions Operation may vary with execution of other instructions The status of SM8029 is ON regardless of whether operation ends normally or abnormally d 2 or d2 2 is however ON when operation ends abnormally so you can distinguish between normal operation end or abnormal end Communication execution Operation Device operated simultaneously state output device d or d2 Instruction execution flag During instruction execution ON Inverter CH1 SM8920 Other than instruction execution communicating CH2 SM8930 OFF CH3 SM8940 CH4 SM8950 d 1 or d2 1 Instruction execution normal end When instruction is completed Operation of the SM8029 flag normally ON instruction execution When instruction activation complete flag contact rises OFF d 2 or d2 2 Instruction abnormal end flag When instruction ends in error ON When instruction activation contact rises OFF Simultaneous driving o
179. f the sum obtained by adding the corresponding data as hexadecimal numbers One can select whether to include the sum check in the message or not using the communication settings e When sum check code added is selected the sum check code is added in the message during sending During receiving the sum check code is compared with the value calculated from the received data to check the received data e When sum check not added is selected the sum check code is not added so the received data is not checked either A calculation example of the sum check code is shown below ex Serial communication settings Header Provided DLE STX SD8623 0210H SD3624 0000H Terminator Provided DLE ETX SD8625 0310H SD3626 0000H Sum check code Added Control procedure CR LF added For send data Header Data area Terminator Sum data The order is different E E from the data area order of order of order of order of order of order of order of order of order of order of D101 SD8625 SD8625 Send data Sum check code target Low order bits of D100 31H High order bits of D100 32H Low order bits of D101 33H High order bits of D101 34H Low order bits of SD8625 10H DLE High order bits of SD8625 03H ETX DDH Converted into ASCII codes 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 14 5 Programming 9 BlFor receive data Header Data area Terminator Sumdata The orde
180. flag M111 The PLC does not execute the IVWR instruction even if SM8920 is turned OFF IVWR instruction execution complete because another instruction IVCK instruction is being executed when drive contact M1 turns ON 2 When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication the next inverter communication instruction is executed after the current instruction is completed 8 SM8920 remains OFF until the next inverter communication instruction is driven after execution of the current inverter communication instruction is completed 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 8 Programming 99 2 Precautions for programming When communicating with inverters for multiple items set the command contact for inverter communication instruction to ON until transmission is complete Program so that the command contact is turned OFF when all communication with the inverter has been completed using the instruction execution normal end flag d 1 or d2 1 instruction execution abnormal end flag d 2 or d2 2 or instruction execution completed flag 8M8029 e If using instruction execution normal end flag d 1 or d2 1 or instruction execution abnormal end flag d 2 or d2 2 X1 SET vo Command is latched MO IVCK d1 M100 H Communication is executed Instruction normal completion M101 RST EM Command is reset Instruction abnormal completion M102 When using instruction execution complete flag
181. follows lI When sending lI When receiving Length calculation Data Length Length calculation Data Length result setting Send result Receive setting p gt 4 sve BENT CEBIA e 2 1 APPENDIX 8 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Calculating range The following shows specification examples of the calculating range of Length Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet element 1 element 2 element 3 element n 2 element n 1 element n Sd a DS LLLA Lo SR Packet format Header Length Static data eee Variable Terminator Check code Calculating range when specifying 1 to n I I I I Example 1 i i I I Calculating range when specifying 3 to n 2 Example 2 I 1 Calculating range when specifying 3 to n Example 3 i Example 1 Calculating range when 1 and n are specified as the start and the end respectively Example 2 Calculating range when 3 and n 2 are specified as the start and the end respectively Example 3 Calculating range when 3 and n are specified as the start and the end respectively Data examples of Non conversion Variable Shows the data examples of element non conversion variable that can be placed in a packet Data example 1 The following table shows data to be stored in the data storage area when the string of send data is ABCD ASCII code A 41H B 42H C 43H and D 44H Item Description Fixed Length Variable Length Fixed Length Data Length Maximum Data Le
182. formed For verification mismatch the receive data is discarded and the CPU unit waits for the next receive data Page 216 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Settable receive packet expected packet is up to 16 Verification mismatch Counterpart device Data area 1 FX5 CPU module Receive packet expected packet Verification match Data area 2 Receiving completed Data area 2 The operation is as follows Normal completion FX5 CPU module Drive S P CPRTCL instruction Completion device d Receive packet Verification match Counterpart device Receive packet MError completion transmission monitoring timeout error FX5 CPU module Error occurred Drive S P CPRTCL instruction Completion device d Completion status indication device d 1 Receive wait time I Verification mismatch Receive packet Receive packet Counterpart device Poin tr When variables are included in receive packet elements variable parts are not verified 214 When more than one receive packet is specified received data is verified with the receive packet information of the first registered packet in the order of registration The receive processing is performed once received data match one of the receive packet number and further verification is not performed The receive packet number which is matched as the resu
183. g 39 Precautions e The RS2 instruction cannot be used in the same serial port as that of the inverter communication instruction and predefined protocol support instruction To change the header terminator time out time or 8 bit processing mode do so before the RS2 instruction is driven while off The change is enabled when the RS2 instruction is driven While the RS2 instruction is being driven do not change the header terminator time out time or 8 bit processing mode Applicable frames Message frames used in communication can be selected by setting the communication parameter The table below shows message frames applicable to the RS2 instruction 1 Data NO Data CR LF 3 Data Data CR LF 5 Data 6 Data CR LF 7 8 Data CR LF 9 Data CR LF 11 12 CR LF llHeader When headers are set in the communication settings Page 136 the set values are stored in SD8623 and SD8624 for CH1 SD8633 and SD8634 for CH2 SD8643 and SD8644 for CH3 and SD8653 and SD8654 for CH4 Up to four headers can be set JI Header e When data is sent the stored data in the devices above is added at the head of the specified send data M When data is received receiving of the data begins when the stored data in the devices above is received continuously If the first header value is OOH the header settings are not configured The area before OOH in 1 byte units is used to set the he
184. g absence presence of Errors 1 llli ees 34 2 9 Related DEVICES o DUET 36 List of related devices 0 ee ee eee eee eee hh hrs 36 Details of related devices hrs 41 CHAPTER3 MC PROTOCOL 48 3 1 Funcion SUIMMANY 2 onc cte nites tanec eh cae E ewan gee E ad Re Reed os OM eee alee Bae as 48 3 2 Procedures before Operation 2 221 ERR RIS TRO OEE cn e Seeded hee SUCRE E NURSE RT 49 3 3 System Configuratloli 2 zdu lcu ky sa kx aos eRe ee VOR RR dog Row eke Cau c a ee 49 3 4 SOCCINCANONS serer rinan EEE ER TORT ETTITITTTTTDPIPRPUIPTTTPPEICT 50 Communication specifications anaa aaaea 50 GNK SpeCINCaON S s ara a r E a eed E eee eae e E E E E dO e E Gebers ee deno op eee 50 3 5 WIGING EE E E E E E E EEE E EE T 52 WINO DEOGGCOUEG S 2 srera e a Err E E AEE N PEE 52 Selecting connection method use anaa anaa e 52 Termination resistor setting ia is ERR RE REDE edsh waeeeeu ded AEMECS TRIER RR Rond R4 RR FERE EG 55 Connection diagrami 3 35 23 99 9 22 2 Re t aree uh Eug Re mde sh Edi sae aq iudi Ed Sq e qux a 55 toes MNMNRCTTTTTT L 57 3 6 Communication Setting lllllleeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees ehh hh hh 57 3 7 MC Protocol Command acu x aoa can 08 67 e doe a eee Tee d ER oec 59 Command ISi osasi 59 Applicable device sa cre ree edo oes eR Pee dE v ees es ee S oe ee MUR oe QUE eee oe eee 61 3 8
185. g completed flag turns ON To make the PLC wait to receive set the amount of received data n2 to 1 or more and set the receiving completed flag from ON to OFF e Set the amount of received data to a value including terminators sum check and CR LF If the specified amount of received data is less the serial communication error flag turns ON When the terminator is set to Do Not Add in the communication settings an error does not occur Full duplex bi directional communication operation llSend completed start send operation When sending of the data is completed the sending request flag is automatically set to OFF When RS2 instruction is executed again after the sending request flag is set to ON the PLC starts to send llSend completed start receive operation For full duplex bi directional communication send and receive can operate simultaneously For the operation timing of send completed and start receive refer to the following e Operation during data send Page 146 e Operation during data receive Page 147 llReceive completed start send operation For full duplex bi directional communication send and receive can operate simultaneously For the operation timing of send completed and start receive refer to the following e Operation during data send Page 146 e Operation during data receive Page 147 llReceive completed start receive operation Receiving completed flag turns ON when receiving is com
186. ge of values allowed for the CPU module confirm that the conversion size is set correctly If the size exceeds the range for word data change the conversion size setting to double word If the size exceeds the range for double word data change the element to non conversion variable 7D20H Data length The value set in the data length storage area or the data Check the maximum data length that can be set to size error data count size error count storage area is out of range 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION the data length storage area and specify a value that is equal to or smaller than the maximum data length Check the maximum number of data that can be set to the data count storage area and specify a value that is equal to or smaller than the maximum number of data 201 6 9 Troubleshooting Error codes Description of error Error handling hexadecimal 7D21H Decimal point An out of range decimal point position is set when the Check the set decimal point position place number of decimals is set to variable point Check the number of digits setting and set the specification The number of decimals is larger than the number of digits decimal point position so that the number of decimals error for each data is less than the number of digits 7F20H ASCII gt BIN When data is received by conversion variable the data Check the sent message of the counterpart device conversion corresponding to the con
187. hange the value with program or engineering tool Stores the communication response wait time set in the communication settings Page 95 SD8981 SD8991 SD9001 SD9011 Stores the communication response wait time of inverter communication 1 to 32767 ms R Read only If the set value is outside the range or less than 100 ms response waiting time operates as 100 ms Do not change the value with program or engineering tool SD8503 0 MELSOFT Connection 2 MC protocol 3 N N Network Communication 5 Non protocol Communication T Inverter Communication 9 MODBUS RTU Communication 12 Predefined protocol support Other than above Not used SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 SD8419 SD8439 R Read only Do not change the value with program or engineering tool These devices store 7 while an inverter communication instruction is being driven or not as long the communication mode has not changed 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 12 4 10 Related Devices T D NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION This chapter describes non protocol communication 5 1 Function Summary Non protocol communication exchanges data between a printer bar code reader etc with no protocol Non protocol communication is available using the RS2 instruction The RS2 instruction can simultaneously communicate on 4 channels by specifying the channels Up to 4096 points of data can be sent and up to 4096 points of data can be received e
188. he sum check is provided add 4 to this value also Further when specifying an extension add 7 to this value also 4 The number of points is counted in 1 word units 3 4C Frame In case of binary code When format5 is used Time to read continuous word devices data registers etc in one station ms 42 4 x R x T ms V S SD524 x 3 D Time to write continuous word devices data registers etc in one station ms 40 4 x WO x T ms V S SD524 x 3 D 5 This is the number of characters when format5 is used and the sum check is not provided at the time of execution of batch read write command Further when the sum check is provided add 4 to this value also Further when specifying an extension add 7 to this value also When 10H exists in the data area since DLE 10H is added just before 10H add 10H numeral 6 The number of points is counted in 1 word units llTime to send or receive one character The table below shows the time required to send or receive one character when the start bit is 1 bit the data length is 7 bit the parity is 1 bit and the stop bit is 1 bit total 10 bits 300 33 34 600 16 67 1200 8 34 2400 4 17 4800 2 08 9600 1 04 19200 0 52 38400 0 26 57600 0 17 115200 0 08 The tables below show the data transfer times depending on the number of continuously read or written word devices at transmission speeds of 9600 bps and 19200 bps when the message waiting ti
189. heck the status of the LED display of RD and SD on the CPU module or the communication board communication adapter LED status Operation status RD Data is being sent or received Off Data is being received but not being transmitted Data is being transmitted but not being received Off Off Data is neither being transmitted nor being received O 5 5 5 When normally sending and receiving data with non protocol communication the LEDs both flash brightly If they do not flash check the wiring and the communication settings Checking installation e Connection status The communication cannot be operated if the PLC and the communication board communication adapter are not connected correctly For the connection procedure refer to the following LLIFX5U User s manual Hardware LIFX5UC User s manual Hardware Wiring Verify that all communication equipment is correctly wired Page 131 Wiring Checking sequence program S P CPRTCL instruction cannot be used in the same serial port which is being used for any other communication such as inverter communication instruction RS2 instruction L Page 212 Combined Use of Serial Communication Checking the communication settings Verify that protocol type is Predefined Protocol Support Function When the protocol type is not Predefined Protocol Support Function communication will not function correctly L Page 168 Communication Settings After
190. hh hh nn 136 5 7 PIOJgFaDImiliq ou oi oot ew gor pete Het a Y Dro dep Edd d HE land SES d Errors dog Ga a d d ewes teed ens 139 Serial data communication lisse 139 Operation of control line RS 232C lllllleleeeel elles 150 Precautions for program creation 1 0 ehh rs 153 5 8 TFGUDICSNOOUNG renaren EE ERE ERU Iu A Exe sane teen pees ER Que RES DEREN Ea wed 154 Checking communication status based on LED display 0 0 0c ccc eee ee ene 154 Checking installation a acute a nneur atea ore cee oe d depono a ee eek de d debe wb ee ae elc nep Rr E ded Eod d 154 Checking sequence pEFOGLFAIT 2 ceed Boe x pm e Rees e ES Xm med oceups Rue D BES ae Sure dear Qe eredi Ree 154 Checking the communication settings llli 154 Caution on write during RUN when RS2 instruction is driven 2 0 0 0 00 cc eee 154 Checking absence presence of errors eee ss 154 5 9 Related DeviceS 1 ccc hh hh hh n hh nnn 156 List of related devices EIE aie TTL TO TC ede ee Minha es Bd eg acd SS ware emcee adhe ees yi a eee 156 Details of related devices eee eee ees 157 CHAPTER6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 165 6 1 Function SUMMALY iia xd ick oe et estat tie Rc aoi ida eds icae a eed dew eave sea eo ea dee 165 6 2 Procedure before Operation sies nr Eg RR ee ee ee ew ee ER RR XR RC Ra 166 6 3 System ConliglrallONks suu dor cirieerb diac dede Go dC Rand Dd do acu oae d air dud E Idi du
191. ication O error at slave station 3 Except station 3 SD9049 Number of communication O error at slave station 4 Except station 4 SD9050 Number of communication O error at slave station 5 Except station 5 SD9051 Number of communication O error at slave station 6 Except station 6 SD9052 Number of communication O error at slave station 7 Except station 7 SD9061 Data transmission error code Stores the error code for the master station L xX O Master station Station 1 to 7 38 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices SD9062 Number of data transfer sequence errors occurred in other slave station However data sequence errors that occurred in the local station slave station cannot be detected Data transmission error code slave station 1 SD9063 Data transmission error code slave station 2 SD9064 Data transmission error code slave station 3 SD9065 Data transmission error code slave station 4 SD9066 Data transmission error code slave station 5 SD9067 Data transmission error code slave station 6 SD9068 Data transmission error code slave station 7 SD9080 Station number settings Set the local station number SD9081 Number of slave stations Set the number of connected slave stations L setting L O Station 1 to 7 O Station 1 to 7 O Station 1 to 7 O Station 1 to 7 O Station 1 to 7 SD9082 Refresh range setting status Refresh range check same description as S
192. ication specifications K Refer to Page 16 Specifications Communication specifications link specifications Link pattern and number of link points Link time 2 System configuration and selection KL Refer to Page 15 System Configuration System Configuration Select communication equipment 3 Wiring K Refer to Page 19 Wiring Wiring with twisted pair cable Wiring example 4 Communication settings K Refer to Page 22 Communication Setting 5 Program creation K Refer to Page 25 Programming Communication test program Master station program Slave station program 1 For more details about the connection and operation methods between the engineering tool GX Works3 and PLC refer to the manual below LGX Works3 Operating Manual 2 3 System Configuration This section outlines the system configuration required to use the N N Network You can use the N N Network function in the CPU module using the built in RS 485 port communication board and communication adapter Allotment of serial ports is set to the following fixed numbers regardless of system configuration II X5U CPU module II X5UC CPU module CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH4 Communication adapter 2 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH3 Communication adapter 1 CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH1 Built in RS 485 port CH2 Communication board 2 N N NETWORK 1 2 2 Procedures before Operation 5 16 Communication device Built in RS
193. ice is read to MO M4065 The information from M4065 link device is read to Y11 M4066 The information from M4066 link device is read to M15 The information from M4070 to M4085 link devices MOV K4M4070 K4Y20 is read to Y20 to Y37 MOV D1010 D10 s information from D1010 link device is read to Data transfer sequence error in slave station No 2 SM9042 M4128 The information from M4128 link device is read to M1 2 M4129 Cvm 5 The information from M4129 link device is read to Y12 M4130 The information from M4130 link device is read to M18 The information from M4140 to M4155 link devices MOV K4M4140 KAM20 is read to M20 to M35 MO D1020 D20 s information from D1020 link device is read to Refer to the above for creating the error monitoring program of station number 3 or later For details on the link devices refer to K Page 25 Contents of related devices For cautions on program creation refer to K Page 32 Cautions on program creation 2 N N NETWORK 30 2 Programming Create programs for the slave stations Create programs for the slave stations Arbitrarily create programs for reading and writing link devices The following program is for the slave station of station number 1 Program for station number 2 and later are similar Program for indicating link errors This program is required to indicate the N N Network status Create this step for each connected slave station Data transfer sequence e
194. il all bytes have been processed The final result is CRC value 8 The CRC value is stored in a packet in the order of lower 8 bits upper 8 bits Ex The calculation example of 16 bit CRC for MODBUS llPacket example 02H 07H 41H 12H WCalculation method of 16 bit CRC for MODBUS for the above packet example 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0010 1111 1101 Load a 16 bit register whose bits are all 1 02H Station number Exclusive OR XOR Shift 1 0111 1111 1111 1110 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 Exclusive OR XOR 1101 1111 1111 1111 Shift 2 0110 1111 1111 1111 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 Exclusive OR XOR 1100 1111 1111 1110 Shift 3 0110 0111 1111 1111 Shift 4 0011 0011 1111 1111 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 Exclusive OR XOR 1001 0011 1111 1110 Shift 5 0100 1001 1111 1111 Shift 6 0010 0100 1111 1111 Generator polynomial 1010 0000 0000 0001 Exclusive OR XOR 1000 0100 1111 1110 Shift 7 0100 0010 0111 1111 Shift 8 0010 0001 0011 1111 Generator polynomial Exclusive OR XOR 07H Function code Exclusive OR XOR 1010 0000 1000 0001 0000 0111 6 1000 0001 0011 1001 APPENDIX 2 2 9 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 0000 0001 0011 1110 Shift 1 Generator polynomial Exclusive OR XOR Shift 2 Generator polynomial Exclusive OR XOR Shift 3 Generator polynomial Exclusive OR XOR Shift 4
195. included Element Name Code Type Setting Value Element Name Code Type Setting Value Asci Control Code CR 1 byte Input Control Code Setting Range 1 to 50 OK Cancel Set the name of the element Select a data type of the setting value E ASCII String ASCII Control Code HEX Set data within 1 to 50 bytes Setting example The setting ranges that can be set for each code type are as follows ASCII String ABC ASCII String 20H to 7EH ASCII Control Code ETX ASCII Control Code 00H to 1FH and control code of 7FH HEX FFFF HEX hexadecimal data of OOH to FFH Considerations for configuring packet element Only one terminator can be used in a packet e A terminator can be set only at the end of a packet Check code and static data only can be placed after the terminator Data area 1 78 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting Length Use this element when an element indicating the data length is included in a packet e When sending Calculates the data length of a specified range and adds the result to a send packet When receiving Verifies the data value corresponding to the length in the received data as the data length of the specified range For data examples of length refer to L Page 217 Data examples of Length Element Name Data Length Code Type ASCII Hexadecimal Data Length 2 Data Flow Forward Direction Upp
196. ing complete flag is cleared Amount of data The calculation received result is converted SD8561 Increments each time into ASCII codes data is received and compared OOH Receiving sum calculation result OOH 35H 6BH A2H DAH EAH EDH SD8564 Precautions When odd data is received the higher order 8 bits of data of the last device holds the data received previously 144 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 Programming Mi8 bit mode RUN monitor SM400 K _ 16 bit data Lower 8 bi Serial communication setting The upper 8 bits are ignored Header Added DLE STX SD8623 0210H SD8624 0000H Only the lower 8 bits are valid Terminator Added DLE ETX SD8625 0310H SD8626 0000H e Sum check code Added Control procedure CR LF added Control mode None RS 232C Send data and amount of remaining send data Header Data area Terminator Sum data The order is different ss CENE MEE from the data area Send data Number of bytes to be sent specified by n1 Sending request SM8561 MEM Set it in the Automatically reset when program 4 3 sending is completed Amount of 2 i remaining send 0 data SD8560 Sending sum 00H 31H 63H 96H CAH DAH DDH SD8565 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 14 5 Programming 5 e Receive data and amount of data received Header Data area Terminator Sum data The
197. ing is received 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 8 Programming 97 Program example The following shows an example of a program to execute consecutively the protocols in order of protocol numbers 4 7 and 5 from the communication board CH2 with the predefined protocol support function Drive instruction MHH sorok Normal Abnormal end flag end flag MO M1 SET M101 Abnormal end flag M1 O e scri ition Drive S P CPRTCL instruction Protocol number executed first 4 Protocol number executed second 7 Protocol number executed hird 5 Communication CH2 Consecutive execution of 3 protocols 4 gt 7 gt 5 Result of executed instruction Normal end flag is turned ON Abormal end flag is turned ON Error code is stored X20 Trigger of drive S P CPRTCL instruction SD9102 Predefined protocol ready MO Start device of control data M1 Control data Protocol number executed first M101 Control data Protocol number executed second M102 Control data Protocol number executed third 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 198 6 8 Programming When the send receive data monitoring function is used add a program as follows Program example Monitor start Monitor start trigger Monitoring X21 M21 T FMOV ko Ro HoDo0 0 clear Monitor data MOV Monitor start instruction Monitor start BEN M20 Turn on Monitoring RST M2 SOS Me when the monitoring starts SET Monitoring setti
198. ion setting of the send receive data monitoring function is W function option setting stored SD9232 SD9242 SD9252 SD9262 Monitoring data device The type of word device used as the monitor data areas is stored W specification SD9233 SD9243 SD9253 SD9263 Monitoring data start device The start device number of word devices used as the monitor data W No specification areas is stored SD9234 SD9244 SD9254 SD9264 Monitoring data size The size of word devices used as the monitor data areas is stored in R specification word units R Read only W Write only R W Read Write 204 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 10 Related Devices Details of related devices The devices described below are used in predefined protocol support function In error SM8500 R Read only After a device above turns ON the error code is stored in the corresponding device below SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored Precautions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool Serial communication error does not turn OFF even if the communication is restored to normal state The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF ON RUN gt STOP system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON SD8500 R Read only Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Serial communication error code is not cleared eve
199. ioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if co
200. iple blocks When specifying bit devices 16 bit is intended in 1 point 0082H Assumes an n point part of a MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of 960 points intelligent unit as 1 block and writes data by randomly specifying multiple blocks Remote RUN 1001H 0000H Requests remote RUN to a device Remote Run Remote STOP 1002H OOOOH Requests remote STOP to a device Remote Stop Remote PAUSE 1003H OOOOH Requests remote PAUSE to a device x Remote Pause Remote Latch 1005H 0000H Requests remote latch clear when a device is in STOP mode Clear Remote Latch Clear Remote Reset 1006H OOOOH Requests remote reset to cancel error stop mode of a device Remote Reset CPU model name 0101H OOOOH Reads a processor module name code processor type of a device reading Read Type Name Loop back test 0619H 0000H Checks if normal communication is possible Self Test LED OFF error 1617H OOOOH Clears all errors in batches and turns OFF LED code initialization Clear Error 1 With device extension specification the number of points that can be set become fewer When using the device extension specification calculate doubling the number of access points 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 7 MC Protocol Command Applicable device The table below shows devices and device number range that can handled in commands used in communication by MC protocol Specify devices and device number range that are there
201. l Two s complement is designated Two s complement for 0000 0015H FFFF FFEBH When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FFEBH decimal 65515 Calculating range Tete rr ell e check For the data shown above Sum check value 51H 4AH 37H 31H 43H 32H 34H 4EH 03H 1FDH llData Flow Forward Direction Data Length 1 No complement calculation is designated Reference Hexadecimal 1FDH Decimal 509 ASCII hexadecimal D 44H FD 46H 44H 1FD 31H 46H 44H 01FD 30H 31H 46H 44H ASCII decimal 9 39H 09 30H 39H 509 35H 30H 39H 0509 30H 35H 30H 39H HEX 01FDH 0001FDH 000001FDH One s complement is designated One s complement for 0000 01FDH FFFF FEO2H When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FEO2H decimal 65026 ASCII hexadecimal 2 32H 02 30H 32H E02 45H 30H 32H FE02 46H 45H 30H 32H ASCII decimal 6 36H 26 32H 36 026 30H 32H 36H 5026 35H 30H 32H 36H HEX FEO2H FFFEO2H FFFFFEO2H Two s complement is designated Two s complement for 0000 01FDH FFFF FEOS3H When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FEO3H decimal 65027 ASCII hexadecimal 3 33H 03 30H 33H E03 45H 30H 33H FE03 46H 45H 30H 33H ASCII decimal 7 37H 27 32H
202. l 2 frequency setting gain 1903 100 96 Reading contact X1 NN s1 s2 s3 n d Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency IVWR K6 K902 HOA K1 M200 10 Hz OLL Head bit device number of instruction execution status output Communication channel 1 to 4 Value written to inverter Inverter parameter number decimal Inverter station number O to 31 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 100 IVWR K6 K1902 H64 K1 M210 u The unit is specified by Analog input selection Pr 7 3 IVWR KG K903 HOC8 K1 M220 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 200 Hz Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 10096 IVWR K6 K1903 D103 K1 M230 2 u The unit is specified by Analog input selection Pr 7 3 Command contact MO Instruction execution completed flag SM8029 ww 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 110 4 8 Programming Inverter parameter block write This instruction writes parameters of an inverter at one time For information concerning inverter communication instruction expressions and execution format refer to LLJProgramming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks ENO IVBWR EN s1 s2 s3 n d Setingdala llContents range data type s1 Inverter station number KO to 31 16 bit signed binary ANY16 s2 Number of parameters in an inverter to be written at one time CENE 16 bit signed binary ANY16 s3 Head device number of a parameter table to be writt
203. l on the protocol setting screen gt Edit gt Protocol Detailed Setting Connected Device Information Manufacturer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC sts s Type meter s sS Model FREQROL Seres Version oon O 0000 to FFFF Explanation General Purpose Inverter Protocol Setting Information Protocol No 2 Protocol Name H7B RD Operation Mode Communication Type Send amp Receive Receive Setting Clear OS area receive data area before protocol execution Enable C Disable Receive Wait Time 0 x100ms Setting Range 0 to 30000 0 Infinite Wait Send Setting Number of Send Retries 0 Times Setting Range 0 to 10 Send Retry Interval 500 x10ms Setting Range 0 to 30000 Standby Time 0 x10ms Setting Range 0 to 30000 Monitoring Time 200 x100ms Setting Range 0 to 3000 0 Infinite Wait Communication Parameter Batch Setting one The setting item of above screen is follows llIConnected Device Information Manufacturer Displays the connected device information x1 Type x a Model x 1 Version x 0000H to FFFFH Explanation x1 HProtocol Setting Information Protocol No Displays the protocol number of the selected protocol Protocol Name Displays the protocol name of the protocol x Arbitrarily 32 characters Communication Displays the communication type of the protocol x e Send Only Type Receive Only X
204. lt of the verification is stored in the control data of the S P CPRTCL instruction APPENDIX Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Send amp receive A packet is sent once and the status changes to the data receive wait status after the transmission completes normally Then data is received from the counterpart device and the process completes when the received data matches the receive packet and the receiving process is performed Page 216 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Settable receive packet expected packet is up to 16 FX5 CPU module Counterpart device Terminator Data area Header Verification mismatch expected packet Data area 1 Data area 2 Verification match Receiving completed Header Data area 2 The operation is as follows Normal completion FX5 CPU module Drive S P CPRTCL instruction Completion device d Completion status ON indication device d 1 a r gt Receive wait time Verification match Counterpart device Send packet MError completion transmission monitoring timeout error FX5 CPU module E d Drive S P CPRTCL rror oe instruction Completion device d Completion status indication device d 1 e Receive wait time Send packet Verification mismatch Counterpart device Send packet APPENDIX 2 1 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 9 Poin
205. mber of the protocol to be executed eighth 0 1 to 64 0 1 to 64 0 1 to 64 0 1 to 16 0 1 to 16 0 1 to 16 0 1 to 16 0 1 to 16 0 1 to 16 0 1 to 16 0 1 to 16 Description Setting Set by range System System User User User User User User User User System System System System System System System System Processing details Protocols registered with the engineering tool are executed The communication CH specified by n1 is used and the protocol to be executed follows the control data of the device specified by s or later Protocols are executed consecutively for the number of the protocols specified by n2 up to eight protocols in one instruction execution The number of executed protocols is stored in the device specified by s 1 e The execution of the S P CPRTCL instruction and whether it has been completed normally or with an error can be checked with the completion device d or resulting of executed protocols device d 1 HM Completion device d The completion device turns on in END processing of the scan performed upon completion of the S P CPRTCL instruction and turns off in the next END processing HM Completion status indication device d 1 The completion device turns on or off depending on the completion status of the S P CPRTCL instruction When completed normally Unchanged from OFF When completed with an error Turns on i
206. me is O ms the maximum scan time is 20 ms and the interval time is 100 ms When the transmission speed is 9600 bps Unit Second When the transmission speed is 19200 bps Unit Second When the types of read or written devices increase Data transfer time shown in above table x Number of device types is required When the number of read or written points exceeds 64 the transfer time increases Accordingly for achieving efficient data transfer it is recommended to decrease the number of types of transferred devices and use as many continuous device numbers as possible 1 When RS 485 one pair wiring using FX 485PC IF is adopted the message waiting time for every exchange must be 70 to 150ms When RS 485 two pair wiring or RS 232C is adopted the message waiting time becomes Oms 3 MC PROTOCOL 1 3 4 Specifications 9 3 9 Wiring This section explains the wiring Wiring procedure 1 Select the connection method Select the connection method suitable to the application Page 52 Selecting connection method 2 Make arrangements for wiring Prepare cables required for wiring lt Page 53 Cable 3 Turn OFF the PLC power Before wiring make sure that the PLC power is OFF 4 Wire the communication equipment Connect the RS 485 communication equipment Page 55 Connection diagram Selecting connection method When using MC protocol 3C 4C frame connection can be achieved in accordance with RS 232C or RS 48
207. mode RUN kK 16 bit data gt monitor Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits SM400 16 bit data is divided into upper id visa 8 bits and lower 8 bits when it is sent or received Serial communication setting Header Added DLE STX SD8623 0210H SD8624 0000H Terminator Added DLE ETX SD8625 0310H SD8626 0000H e Sum check code Added Control procedure CR LF added Control mode None RS 232C e Send data and amount of remaining send data Header Data area Terminator Sum data The order is different nn A from the data area Send data SD8623 SD8623 D100 D101 SD8625 SD8625 Number of bytes to be sent specified by n1 Sending request SM8561 Set in the program Amount of remaining send data Automatically reset when sending is completed SD8560 SD8565 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 14 5 Programming 3 e Receive data and amount of data received Header Data area Terminator Sum data The order is different from the data area D8623 SD8623 D200 Receive data Within the upper limit of number of devices bytes to be received that is specified by n2 Range of data stored in data registers Not stored in data registers Receiving completed SM8562 X Set when Reset it receiving is in the Cleared completed program when header is received Cleared when the receiv
208. more after the number of the monitor data reaches the size of the monitor data Number of monitor data Size of the monitor data Monitor data The monitor data is stored in the following configuration in 1 word units OC ALA CE o e o o 9 o Rem endl remna E epee Mee ojo i js js js 9 YY ein ra a FE Framing error OVR Overrun error PE Parity error One word consists of the send receive data 1 byte for lower 8 bits and the data classification signal monitor for upper 8 bits Upper high rank 4bit b15 to b12 Upper low rank 4bit b11 to b8 Lower 8bit b7 to b0 Data type Signal monitor Send receive data 0 0000b Receive data b11 0 1 0001b Send data 3 0011b Receive error Precautions When the monitor data areas overlap for each channel the data of the smaller channel number is overwritten with the data of the larger channel number because data are stored from the smaller channel number Caution f an error occurs in the mth protocol while multiple protocols are being executed the instruction does not execute the m 1 th protocol and after and is completed with an error e f same instructions are executed for the same channel the subsequent instruction is ignored and is not executed until the preceding instruction is completed e f the receive waiting time is set to 0 Infinite wait the S P CPRTCL instruction is not completed until the data specified in the protocol sett
209. mple The following is an example in the case where the calculated value of length is 258 bytes in decimal hexadecimal 102H Data flow is Forward Direction ASCII hexadecimal 2 32H 02 30H 32H 102 31H 30H 32H 0102 30H 31H 30H 32H ASCII decimal 8 38H 58 35H 38H 258 32H 35H 38H 0258 30H 32H 35H 38H HEX 0102H 000102H 00000102H 1 Values in indicate ASCII code The send receive image is as follows MWhen sending MWhen receiving Length calculation Data Length Length calculation Data Length result setting Send result Receive setting 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 1 byte 2 byte RETI ene APPENDIX 2 1 7 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Data flow is Reverse Direction ASCII hexadecimal E 20 32H 30H 201 32H 30H 31H 2010 32H 30H 31H 30H ASCII decimal EJ 85 38H 35H 852 38H 35H 32H 8520 38H 35H 32H 30H HEX e 0201H 020100H 02010000H 1 Values in indicate ASCII code The send receive image is as follows lI When sending II When receiving Length calculation Data Length Length calculation Data Length result setting Send result Receive setting gt 4 2 byte 2 byte 3 byte H 4 H 3 1 P GEPI toe mm 3 EN llData flow is Byte Swap Odd THO IH 0H ASC cina I E E 88 GN GO GBH GB ex E E w 1 Values in indicate ASCII code The send receive image is as
210. mpleted within a certain amount of time CR LF does not match parameter setting 7624H Framing error Inverter sent the error code H4 The stop bit length is different from the initial set value 7625H Overrun error Inverter sent the error code H5 Before receiving the completed data in the inverter the computer sent the next set of data 7626H Undefined Inverter sent the error code H6 Not defined currently in inverter 7627H Character error Inverter sent the error code H7 Inverter does not accept An unused character other than 0 to 9 A to F and control codes was the received data but is received not brought to an alarm stop 7628H Undefined Inverter sent the error code H8 Not defined currently in inverter 7629H Undefined Inverter sent the error code H9 Not defined currently in inverter 762AH Mode error Inverter sent the error code HA Inverter does not accept A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link operation the received data but is mode or while the inverter was operating not brought to an alarm 762BH Instruction code error Inverter sent the error code HB Instruction code error Non existing stop instruction code was specified 762CH Data range error Inverter sent the error code HC In writing a parameter or operation frequency data outside the allowable range was specified 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 121 4 9 Troubleshooting 762DH 762EH 762FH Undefined Undefined Undefi
211. ms 19200 Number of The first The second The third send receives send receive send receive send receive Ta INT x 10 INT 17 1 x 10 30 ms Ts INT x 10 10 ms Te 1 ir a x 10 INT p x 10 2 INT A 1 x10 10 30 ms T7 1 Ta 1 To 1 7 8 12 19 8 ms T7 1 Te 1 wenns x 114 x 10 x 1000 7 8 ms Ta 1 12 ms Te 2 INT ASE PII 4 x 10 INT 1 x 10 2 INT L 1 x10 10 30 ms T7 2 T8 2 To 2 7 8 12 19 8 ms T7 2 T9 2 x 11 4 x 10 x 1000 7 8 ms Ta 2 12 ms Te 3 INT LOSE TSS ToS y qa 10 INT H x 10 INT T7 3 Te 3 To 3 10 4 30 40 4 ms T7 3 T9 3 x 9411 x 10 x 1000 10 4 ms Ta 3 30 ms Tinv T1 T2 Ta 10 240 1 251 ms 19200 40 4 0 ig 1 x10 10 60 ms 1 19200 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 4 Specifications Calculation example 3 Calculation of required time when Pr 10 to Pr 14 s2 5 are written by the IVBWR instruction Tinv T4 T5 T3 851 ms T4210x s2 50 ms T3 1 ms Calculate T5 as follows because Pr 10 to Pr 14 do not require change of the 2nd parameter and the time required for writing is Same in each parameter T2 2 x T4 T5 Te 1 Te 2 2 x T4 T5 Te 3 Te 4 eee Time required to write Pr 10 Time required to write Pr 11 5 x 2 x 14 T5 Te 1 To 2 5 x 2 x 80 10 30 50 800 ms
212. munication setting essential items The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases 0 to 31 48 PU communication station number PU communication speed Up to 16 inverters can be connected 4800 bps 9600 bps 192 19200 bps 384 38400 bps Pr 119 PU communication stop bit length 10 Data length 7 bits Stop bit 1 bit Pr 120 PU communication parity check 2 Even Pr 123 PU communication waiting time 9999 Set in communication data setting Pr 124 PU communication CR LF presence absence selection Pr 79 Operation mode selection External operation mode is selected when power is turned ON Pr 549 Protocol selection B Mitsubishi inverter computer link protocol Pr 340 Communication startup mode 1 or 10 1 Network operation mode selection 10 Network operation mode Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode from the operation panel CR Provided LF Not provided Ii 3 operation operation Parameters that must be adjusted for test operation and operation are as follows Pr 121 Number of PU communication 9999 Set the value shown on the left during adjustment and set a value from 1 to retries 10 during operation Pr 122 PU communication check time 9999 Set the value shown on the left during adjustment and set a value in interval accordance with the system specification during operation 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 93 4 6 Inverter
213. n END processing of the scan performed upon completion of the S P CPRTCL instruction and turns off in the next END processing When the processing is completed abnormally the error code is stored in the result of executed protocols s Instruction execution timing The following figure shows the S P CPRTCL instruction execution timing Sequence scan 0 to END process 0 to END process 0 to END process 0 to END process S P CPRTCL instruction Completion device d 7 Completion status Me Turns ON when completed indication device A with an error d 1 P NN RN Serial communication Executing a protocol Protocol execution status The current status of the protocol can be checked with the following devices Protocol execution status SD9150 SD9170 SD9190 SD9210 The value corresponding to the current protocol execution status is stored in each of the devices above However when a specific event has occurred the status is changed to another status Any of the values listed in the following table is stored in each of the devices above Protocol execution status Stored value Protocol execution status Description 0 Unexecuted The protocol has never been executed since the power supply turned on or the system reset Once the protocol has been executed the status of the protocol does not return to unexecuted until the power supply is turned on or the system is reset 1 Waiting for transmission The status before starting to se
214. n after communication is restored to normal state They are cleared by turning the PLC power OFF ON RUN gt STOP resetting the system or by SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON I on settings The communication parameters set in the communication settings are stored when the power is turned OFF ON or the system is reset 1 gt Page 168 Communication Settings SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Stores the setting of the communication parameter R R Read only The descriptions of the communication parameters are as follows b1 Parity bit b2 b1 b2 0 0 Not provided 0 1 Odd 1 1 Even 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 2 6 10 Related Devices 05 b4 Baud rate b7 b6 b5 b4 b5 0 0 1 1 300 bps b6 0 1 0 0 b7 0 1 0 1 600 bps 1200 bps 0 1 1 0 2400 bps 0 1 1 1 4800 bps 1 0 0 0 9600 bps 1 0 0 1 19200 bps 1 0 1 0 38400 bps 1 0 1 1 57600 bps 1 1 0 1 115200 bps Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool They are cleared by turning the PLC power OFF ON RUN gt STOP or by resetting the system operation mode Stores the communication function code used in the serial communication under execution SD8503 SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 0 MELSOFT Connection 2 MC protocol 3 N N Network Communication 5 Non protocol Communication T Inverter Communication 9 MODBUS RTU Communication 12 Predefined protocol support Other than above Not
215. n mode Verify that the inverter is set to the external operation mode Verify that no signal is being input to the external terminals STF and STR Verify that the correct change operation mode program is being executed 2 When an inverter cannot be started even in computer link operation mode Verify that the program for starting the inverter is executed correctly Verify that the operation command rights and speed command rights are set correctly Verify that the allowable communication time interval is set correctly 3 When an inverter is stopped by an alarm during operation due to defective communication Verify that a communication cable is connected correctly between the PLC and the inverter Check for poor contact or wire breakage Verify that a sequence program is created so that communication is executed with each inverter within a constant cycle Set the communication check time interval to a large value and check the communication status Verify that the allowable communication time interval is set correctly Verify that termination resistors are set correctly Checking absence presence of errors If an inverter communication error occurs it is processed as a serial communication error Page 101 Serial communication error MError flags The following devices turn ON when an error occurs during serial communication FX5 dedicated FX3 Series Description compatible CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 SM8063 SM84
216. n response and time t out Timeout Retry Count Setting d E Monitoring Time Set time out period gum Monitoring Time 50 ms BL ink Device E k Device Bet Set top number of the bit device for links Device M1000 E Link Device Word Settopnumber of the word device for Inks Device D 2 N N NETWORK 2 6 Communication Setting BSM SD Setting E Latch Setting Set the latch of SM SD device Host Station Mo Dio Nat Latch e Total Number of Local Station Do Not Latch Refresh Range Do Not Latch Timeout Retry Count Setting Dio Mat Latch Monitoring Time Do Not Latch E FAS Serres Gompatbility The SM SD device of FX3 series compatibility SM SD for Compatible Disable Communication board CH2 TZ Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt Extended Board Window The following screen will be displayed if FX5 485 BD is set for the extended board and N N Network is set for the communication protocol type Fixed setting and SM SD setting are the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 j L llBasic Settings Extended Board Set the extended board type Extended Board FXb 48b BD E Communication Protocol Type Set communication protocol type bes Communication Protocol Type M M Network Communication adapter CH3 CH4 When an expansion adapter is used add expansion adapter to Module Information 4 Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module
217. ncy from the PLC FREQROL V500 series P Connection destination PU port FR ASNR nmunication setting essential items The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases 9600 bps Pr 119 Stop bit length data length Stop bit 1 bit Pr 117 Communication station number 0 to 31 Up to 16 inverters can be connected 192 19200 bps Pr 120 Parity check provided not provided 2 Even Pr 118 Communication speed 48 4800 bps Data length 7 bits Pr 123 Waiting time setting 9999 Set in communication data e Pr 124 CR LF provided not provided 1 CR Provided LF Not provided selection Pr 79 Operation mode selection External operation mode is selected when power is turned ON Pr 340 Communication startup mode 1 or 10 1 Network operation mode 10 Network operation mode Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode from the operation panel selection 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 6 Inverter Communication Settings n test operation operation XX Parameters that must be adjusted for test operation and operation are as follows Pr 121 Number of communication retries 9999 Set the value shown on the left during adjustment and set a value from 1 to 10 during operation Pr 122 Communication check time interval 9999 Set the value shown on the left during adjustment and set a value in accordance with the system specification during operation llCautions du
218. ncy setting bias frequency 902 C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 1902 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 903 C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 1903 C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 904 C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 1904 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 905 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 11 4 8 Programming T C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain C42 PID display bias coefficient C43 PID display bias analog value C44 PID display gain coefficient C45 PID display gain analog value Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers Pr 125 Pr 126 C2 to C7 C12 to C19 and C38 to C41 C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency SUM ee i z z co co Z C12 Bias frequency speed for terminal No 1 C13 Bias speed for terminal No 1 C14 Gain frequency speed for terminal No 1 C15 Gain speed for terminal No 1 C16 Bias command torque for terminal No 1 C38 Bias command torque for terminal No 4 C39 Bias torque for terminal No 4 C40 Gain command torque for terminal No 4 C41 Gain torque for terminal No 4 C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 118 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 8 Programming 1905 934 1934 935 1935 902 1902 903 1903 904 1904 905 1905 917
219. nd Delimiter is not No Delimiter Non conversion variable variable length Non verified reception variable number of characters Note that two or more of these four elements cannot be placed in the same packet lFixed number of digits 1 to 10 5 When a Conversion variable variable decimal point and the four elements mentioned in 4 are placed in the same packet these elements need to be placed behind the Conversion variable variable decimal point 6 When a Conversion variable unsigned and the four elements mentioned in 4 are placed in the same packet these elements need to be placed behind the Conversion variable unsigned 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 7 Packet Setting 87 Caution BIA string other than 0 9 A F or a f is received When Conversion is ASCII Hexadecimal HEX an error may occur if a string other than 0 9 A F or a f is received BA string other than 0 9 is received When Conversion is ASCII Decimal HEX an error may occur if a string other than 0 9 is received However the error does not occur in the following cases Item CPU module operation Sign Sign Character When Signed is selected a signed character can be received However when a signed character which is not at the head of data is received an error may occur Number of Decimals When any other than No decimal point is selected a period can be received However an error may occur when
220. nd a packet to the counterpart device When the CPU module is preparing or waiting to send a packet the protocol is in this status 2 A packet is being sent to the counterpart device 3 Waiting for data reception The CPU module waits to receive data from the counterpart device 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 8 Programming 93 Receiving Data was received from the counterpart device and the receive processing is being executed Any of the following processing is included in this status Data verification processing General data processing of when a CPU device is specified as a variable B amp 5 Completed The execution of a protocol has been completed llChanged event 1 Power is turned OFF ON or Power supply ON or system is reset system is reset 2 Protocol execution request A protocol was executed with the S P CPRTCL instruction or the next protocol was executed during executions of multiple protocols Data transmission start Started the transmission of data Send completed Sending is completed Data reception Received data Verification match The verification result of the received data and the packet expected packet is matched Verification mismatch The verification result of the received data and the packet expected packet is mismatched Protocol cancel request The protocol cancel request was accepted and the execution of a protocol was canceled cj oj o Coci AJ OO Error occurred An error
221. ne cada eee ERES EPI UXS Ras See GES tees PSU INED ROS Nx ese 77 COMME GION MICHIOG 2x 2 229 Si ex ee bite es he Se a eo ee we eee eee 78 Cale ceca eee aes Base eae bee Bees be oe eee eh ee aoe See Sete eee eee 80 Connection devices RJ45 connector and distributor 0 0 eee ees 82 Termination resistor setting 0 ccc eee mh hrs 83 Shibldecd WINO weacuducuedee eee nur PAY tesa eee oes teed wade eee eed eed PS Ed ded E 84 t onneclobr dld al tE uoa 244 4 eae ee eee A ewe ees a ee eo eds eee ene 84 Celso PDC 89 4 6 Inverter Communication Settings 0 0 hh hn 90 FREOROLZAO0U SOTIBS 5 224 cues 248 e554 6G SORES RS ERS EERE ORS 44 55550840544406458 0 EE 90 FREQROL F700P A700 series l l uu eec ruw EILERARW ER AEG bce baked whee k teva ced oben keds 92 FREQROL F700PJ E700 D700 E7OOEX series lllslsle RII A rrr 93 FREQROL V500 SEINS se uui dap eed ns eed Ie meus cid iua guias MCI ePi dC PS 94 4 7 PLC Communication settings lllleeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee hh hn 95 4 8 Programming sspe baud nui sete ees eee eta eee dHEEd b oes Lo RE B Pd dU QM SEP era 97 Common items in inverter communication instructions llle 97 Inverter operation monitoring instruction 2 ce eee ee eens 103 Inverter operation control instruction llli rns 105 Inverter parameter read 1 ehh hrs 107 Inverter parameter write l l hrs 109 Inverter parameter block write llle
222. ned Inverter sent the error code HD Not defined currently in inverter Inverter sent the error code HE Not defined currently in inverter Inverter sent the error code HF Not defined currently in inverter BIVMC instruction error codes When errors occur in the send data of the IVMC instruction the following error codes are stored 0000H No error has occurred in both send data 1 and send data 2 Normal end 7640H IVMC instruction send data 1 Mode error The inverter accepts A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link operation mode or while inverter was operating data corresponding to 7641H IVMC instruction send data 1 Instruction code error sana dataa Non existing instruction code was specified It is not brought to an alarm stop 7642H IVMC instruction send data 1 Data range error Data outside the allowable range was specified 7643H IVMC instruction send data 2 Mode error The inverter accepts A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link operation mode or while inverter was operating data corresponding to 7644H IVMC instruction send data 2 Instruction code error seng gata T Non existing instruction code was specified It is not brought to an alarm stop 7645H IVMC instruction send data 2 Data range error Data outside the allowable range was specified 7646H IVMC instruction send data 1 Mode error The inverter does not IVMC instruction send data 2 Mode error accept data 7647H IVM
223. nfigured are also included 146 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 Programming llPrecautions for sending When sending data please take care about the following While the sending request flag is ON do not change the amount of send data or the contents of the send data Do not set the sending request flag to OFF in the program If the send data is changed while the sending request flag M8122 is ON or if the sending request flag M8122 is set to OFF in the sequence program correct data will not be sent Operation during data receive When executing the RS2 instruction the PLC waits to receive When the PLC receives data from the counterpart equipment and receiving data is completed the receiving completed flag turns ON SM8572 SM8582 When the PLC receives data it stores the received data to d to d n2 1 While the receiving completed flag M8123 is ON the PLC cannot receive new data Receiving completed flag SM8562 SM8592 llTime at which receiving is started When the PLC receives data while it is waiting it starts receiving data When receiving begins the PLC stores the received data in interrupt processing regardless of the operation cycle However when the headers are specified in the communication settings the PLC starts receiving when it continuously receives the codes set in the headers The PLC stores the received data except the headers llTime at which receiving is completed The time a
224. ng Manual lt SH 081215ENG gt Description Performance specifications procedures before operation and troubleshooting of the CPU module Describes the details of hardware of the FX5U CPU module including input output specifications wiring installation and maintenance Describes the details of hardware of the FX5UC CPU module including input output specifications wiring installation and maintenance Describes basic knowledge required for program design functions of the CPU module devices labels and parameters Describes specifications of ladders ST FBD LD and other programs and labels Describes specifications of instructions and functions that can be used in programs Describes N N network MELSEC Communication protocol inverter communication non protocol communication and predefined protocol support Describes MODBUS serial communication Describes the functions of the built in Ethernet port communication function Explains methods for the device that is communicating with the CPU module by SLMP to read and write the data of the CPU module Describes the built in positioning function Describes the analog function Describes the contents of communication types supported by PLCs of the FX3 Series or earlier System configuration parameter settings and online operations of GX Works3 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms O indicates a variable part to collec
225. ng error is SD9240 H100F RST detected Monitoring is suspended Option Option specification specification Monitoring X22 M21 MOV SD9241 Data area full stop specification Monitoring stops automatically Monitoring when the number of monitor data M21 size is larger than the specified sp9240 H1002 RST one Monitor stop Monitoring Monitor stop instruction X29 M21 1 MOV Monitor stop instruction Monitor SET stopping M22 SD9240 H1002 RST Turn off each contact when the monitoring stops RST Device Description SD9240 Send receive data monitoring function setting CH2 SD9241 Send receive data monitoring function option setting CH2 e Data area full stop specification Monitor stop Packet stop specification 1 packet stop specification SD9242 Monitoring data device specification CH2 e Monitoring data device R device SD9243 Monitoring data start device No specification CH2 e Monitoring data start device No 0 SD9244 Monitoring data size specification CH2 Monitoring data size DOOH 3328 X21 Monitor start trigger X22 Option specification trigger X23 Monitor stop trigger M20 Monitor start contact M21 Monitoring contact M22 Monitor stopping contact RO to R3329 Monitor data area 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 6 8 Programming 99 6 9 Troubleshooting This chapter explains troubleshooting and error codes Checking communication status based on LED display C
226. ng four elements cannot be placed in the same packet Conversion variable Variable number of data Conversion variable Fixed number of data and Variable number of digits Excluding the case when the number of data is 1 with delimiter Non conversion variable Variable length Non verified reception Variable number of characters 1 90 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting 6 8 Programming This section explains how to create programs for predefined protocol support function using S P CPRTCL instruction and how such programs operate For details on related devices refer to K Page 204 Related Devices For communication settings refer to L Page 168 Communication Settings For protocol settings refer to K Page 170 Protocol Setting Predefined protocol support instruction This section explains the function operation and programming method of the S P CPRTCL instruction For details on the expression and executable format of the S P CPRTCL instruction refer to LAProgramming manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks This instruction is used to execute the predefined protocol registered with the engineering tool via RS 485 built in the CPU module or the communication board and communication adapter installed to the CPU module ENO S CPRTCL EN UO s n1 n2 d ENO SP CPRTCL EN UO s n1 n2 d ES fod joa e o S CPRTCL SP CPRTCL enters O Selingdala ll
227. ngth 4 bytes Unit of Stored Data Lower Bytes Only Data Storage Area Specification DO Data to be stored in data storage area D0 4241H D0 4142H D0 0041H D0 0042H D1 4443H D1 4344H D1 0042H D1 0041H D2 0043H D2 0044H D3 0044H D3 0043H Data example 2 The following table shows data to be stored in the data storage area when the string of send data is EFG ASCII code A 45H B 46H C 43H and D 47H Item Description Fixed Length Variable Length Fixed Length Data Length Maximum Data Length 3 bytes Unit of Stored Data Lower Bytes Only Data Storage Area Specification DO Data to be stored in data storage area D0 4645H D0 4546H D0 0045H D0 0046H D1 0047H D1 4700H D1 0046H D1 0045H D2 0047H D2 0047H D3 any data D3 any data APPENDIX 2 1 9 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Data examples of Conversion Variable Shows the data examples of element conversion variable that can be placed in a packet ata example The following table shows send data when a packet consists of Header Conversion variable Terminator and data stored in the data storage area is DO 837 0345H D1 18 0012H Reference decimal 120345H 1180485 Data example 1 Conversion HEXOASCIDedma Decimal HEXOASClDecma Decimal HEX ASCII Decimal Fixed Number of Data Variable Co Number of Data E Number of Data Fixed Number of Data Number of Data Number of Send Data Blank padded Character
228. nication settings Page 136 is stored when the power is turned OFF ON or the system is reset The stored values are the same as the serial communication property values Page 160 SD8405 SD8425 Stores the setting of the communication parameter R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool These devices store the received sum check value When the sum check code is set to Added in the communication settings Page 136 the sum check is executed for the receive data These devices store the sum added to the received data sent from the counterpart equipment SD8563 SD8573 SD8583 SD8593 SD8414 SD8434 These devices store the received sum check value R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool When the sum check code is set to Added in the communication settings always select Added for the terminator When the sum check code is set to Added in the serial communication settings Page 136 the sum check is executed for the receive data These devices store the sum calculated by the CPU module from the data received from the counterpart equipment SD8564 SD8574 SD8584 SD8594 SD8415 SD8435 These devices store the sum check value calculated using the received data R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool When the sum check code is set
229. nit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes sends data without any byte swap at transmission of the last byte When When Enable is selected receives data swapping the upper byte and lower byte by receiving word 2 bytes When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes stores the last byte to the upper byte When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes stores the last byte without any byte swap Data Storage Area Specify a start device to When Specify a head device of the area where send data is stored Specification store variable value sending When Specify a head device of the area where receive data is stored receiving 1 Refer to L gt Page 183 Settable devices 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 91 6 7 Packet Setting 2 For the variable data length the data storage area is decided by specifying the data length storage area Page 182 When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length Configuration of the data storage area When Fixed Length Variable Length is Fixed Length An area starting from the device number which is specified on the Element Setting screen is considered as the data storage area The data storage area to be occupied varies depending on the setting of Unit of Stored Data When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length is occupied How
230. ns 231 Appendix 3 ASCII Code Tables x arra noi ES QE E ROS So Sui QUSS eee eee E d eus wn kb Rito eee Oban irs pdt 232 INDEX 233 REVISIONS Lia uote Yucca auiem Cd E OI For x oU Rl cn c s ER I Id iio M Ira dci V Rc IN ee N Hc REOR 234 ln ocu TT 235 TRADEMARKS 2b ae oudeader daba ido des Rob don Epor don WR qb CANURa EN Eo een beeen acu demi hob e ad a een 236 CONTENTS 10 RELEVANT MANUALS User s manuals for the module Manual title manual number MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Startup lt JY997D58201 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5U User s Manual Hardware lt JY997D55301 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware lt JY997D61401 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application lt JY997D55401 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design lt JY997D55701 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks lt JY997D55801 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication lt JY997D55901 gt This manual MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual MODBUS Communication lt JY997D56101 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication lt JY997D56201 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP lt JY997D56001 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Positioning Control lt JY997D56301 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Analog Control lt JY997D60501 gt FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition lt JY997D13301 gt GX Works3 Operati
231. nstruction S P CPRTCL instruction If a communications error occurs check if commands above are using the same channel If so first either delete unnecessary command s or correct the channel number then reset the system by turning the power OFF ON 21 2 APPENDIX Appendix 1 Combined Use of Serial Communication Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Operation image of each communication type Operation image of each communication type of protocol as shown below Send only The specified packet is transmitted once e Terminator Data area Header Fm device CPU module SAUNAA Data area Had device The operation is as follows Normal completion FX5 CPU module Drive S P CPRTCL instruction Completion device d mE Completion status N indication device d 1 a Send packet Counterpart device Send packet WError completion transmission monitoring timeout error FX5 CPU module E d Drive S P CPRTCL rror oroare instruction Completion device d Completion status indication device d 1 o 2 Send packet 1 Standby time Cannot send a packet 2 Monitoring time Counterpart device APPENDIX 2 1 3 Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Receive only When data are received from the counterpart device the process completes when the received data matches the receive packet and the receiving process is per
232. nsumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by failure o
233. ntains instructions that cannot be used or Perform a module diagnosis on the engineering tool code error interpreted to check the details program location Check and modify the program step indicated by the error jump Take measures against noise Rewrite the program reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error persists it may be due to a hardware failure of the CPU module Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative 3405H Operation error The operand device number range or data value set for the Check the data specified by the S P CPRTCL S P CPRTCL instruction is out of range instruction 3582H Operation error The instruction that is being used cannot be used in the Correct the program so that the instruction that cannot interruption routine program be used in the interruption routine program is not used 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 203 6 9 Troubleshooting 6 10 Related Devices List of related devices SD8500 SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 Serial communication error Stores the error code when a serial communication error occurs R code SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Serial communication Stores the setting of the communication parameter R settings SD8503 SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 Serial communication This device stores the current communication mode being used R operation mode SD9102 Predefined protocol ready The reflected status after the protocol setting data ha
234. ntrol line will be used so wiring for this signal is required When connected equipment is Data Communication Equipment Counterpart equipment ECUUN in a aaa with RS 232C fie 232 BD Using CSIRS CS RS Name E 232ADP Name 9 pin 25 pin 9 pin D Sub Peres enas D Sub D Sub 8 134 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 5 Wiring RS 485 communication equipment One pair wiring and two pair wiring for RS 422 are applicable for RS 485 communication Wire according to the counterpart equipment The wiring that can be used is limited by the control line setting in the communication settings Page 136 Communication Settings Bidirectional half duplex O Bidirectional full duplex x O O Supported X Not supported llFor one pair wiring n Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port RS 485 Communication FX5 485 BD FX5 485 BD equipment FX5 485ADP FX5 485ADP SDA TXD SDB SDA TXD cE Termination Termination resistor TXD resistor 110 Q 110 Q RDA EA EA cE RDA RXD i i H i i i i i i i i i i i i H 1 1 i j i Class D grounding 1 Class D grounding 1 Make sure to perform Class D grounding on the shield of the twisted pair cable to be connected 2 Make sure to provide a termination resistor at both ends of the wire The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have built in termination resistors Set the termination resistor selector switch t
235. nual Hardware Wiring Verify that all communication equipment is correctly wired lt Page 19 Wiring 2 N N NETWORK 2 8 Troubleshooting 33 34 Checking sequence program With the the channel number that uses N N Network is specified in the instructions to be used in the inverter communication non protocol communication and predefined protocol support function some error may occurs Page 212 Combined Use of Serial Communication Checking the communication setting Verify that protocol type is N N Network When the protocol type is not N N Network communication will not function correctly s Page 22 Communication Setting After changing any communication setting make sure to turn the PLC power from OFF ON or reset the system Checking absence presence of errors Verify that link errors have not occurred in the master station and slave stations The error can be checked using the flags specified below MError flags If a communication error occurs in the N N Network the serial communication error flag turns ON Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON SM8500 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 SM8063 SM8438 WError codes When the serial communication error flag turns ON the error code is stored in the device specified in the table below SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 SD8063 SD8
236. nversion is HEX ASCII Decimal or ASCII Decimal HEX Sign Character Select the sign character for positive value on line This item can be set when Conversion is HEX ASCII Decimal or ASCII Decimal gt HEX and Sign is Signed The sign character for negative value is fixed to For operation of sign character refer to L Page 221 Number of Decimals No Decimal Point Select the decimal point position of data on line Variable Point This item can be set when Conversion is HEX ASCII Decimal or ASCII Decimal HEX 1to9 For operation of number of decimals refer to K gt Page 222 Delimiter No Delimiter Select the delimiter inserted after one data Comma A delimiter is not added to the end of data when the number of data is 2 or more Space For operation of delimiter refer to Page 223 Data Storage Area Specify a start device to store variable value Specification 1 Refer to L gt Page 187 Settable devices MWhen Fixed Number of Data Variable Number of Data is Fixed Number of Data An area starting from the device number which is specified on the element setting screen is considered as the data storage infiguration of the data storage area area Word 25 Specified device Send packet Stores the transmit data Data storage area Receive packet Stores the receive data n When Fixed Number of Data Variable Number of Data is Variable Number of Data An area starting from the device numb
237. o 110 Q Precautions When the control line is set to Bidirectional Full Duplex the built in RS 485 port FX 485 BD and FX5 485ADP become a full duplex interface and echo will occur llFor two pair wiring n Built in RS 485 port Built in RS 485 port RS 485 RS 422 Communication FXx5 485 BD FX5 485 BD equipment FX5 485ADP FX5 485ADP SDA TXD SDB TXD RDA RXD SDA TXD SDB F TXD Termination Termination resistor resistor 330 Q x 2 330 Q x 2 Class D grounding Class D grounding 1 Make sure to perform Class D grounding on the shield of the twisted pair cable to be connected 2 Make sure to provide a termination resistor at both ends of the wire The built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD and FX5 485ADP have built in termination resistors Set the termination resistor selector switch to 330 Q 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 5 5 Wiring 35 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e Perform Class D grounding Grounding resistance 100 Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding cannot be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the following LAFX5U User s manual Hardware LAFX5UC User s manual Hardware Other amp O Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should b
238. of word device cannot be used 8 Only nibble specification of bit device can be used 4 Nibble specification of bit device cannot be used 5 Only bit specification of word device can be used Writes set value of s3 to the instruction code Page 72 of s2 for station No s1 of the inverter connected to the communication channel n 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 1 4 8 Programming 05 Operation error Operation errors pertaining to the instruction are as follows ON 1810 When specified channel is used with another instruction ON 2820 When specified device exceeds the device range ON 3405 When the value specified for s1 is other than KO to 31 When the value specified for n is other than K1 to 4 ON 3600 When specified channel is not setting parameter Jram e Switches the operation speed HED of the inverter Station No 3 to speed 1 40 Hz speed 2 20 Hz with 60 Hz as the initial value on startup Writing contents D10 operation speed initial value 60 Hz speed 1 40 Hz speed 2 20 Hz RUN monitor SM400 Initial value at startup 60 Hz Switch command Speed 1 M10 M20 MOVP K4000 Operation speed 40 Hz Switch command Speed 2 M20 M10 D10 Set frequency write RAM _ Head bit device number of instruction execution status output Communication channel 1 to 4 Read value storage destination Inverter instruction codes Inverter station number O to 31 p 4
239. ommunication Protocol Type Inverter Communication E Advanced Settings Set detailed zetting Data Length Thit ve Parity Bit Even Stop Bit Ibit Baud Rate 9 6D bp lBlFixed Setting E Response Wortag Tane Set response waiting time Dm Response Waiting Time 100 mz 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 7 PLC Communication settings 95 BSM SD Setting C Lateh Setting Set the latch of SM SD device e Advanced Settings Do Mot Latch ie Response Waiting Time Do Mot Latch E FX3 Series Compatibilty The SM SD device of FX3 series compatibility SMASD for Compatible Disable Communication board CH2 XX Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt Extended Board The following screen will be displayed if FX5 485 BD is set for the extended board and Inverter Communication is set for the communication protocol type Fixed setting and SM SD setting are the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 llBasic Settings Extended Board Set the extended board type i Extended Board FXb 485 BD Communication Protocol Type Setcommunication protocol type Communication Protocol Type Inverter Communication i Advanced Settings Set detailed setting Data Length bit 2 Parity Bit Even Stop Bit Ibit Baud Rate 9 600bps Communication adapter CH3 CH4 When an expansion adapter is used add expansion adapter to Module Information XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Info
240. on and then retries communication twice 3 times in total 2 When display of the number of times of password disable error is enabled using Pr 297 and when a password disable error occurs 5 times the reading writing restriction cannot be disabled even if the right password is input For recovery from this status it is necessary to all clear all parameters 8 Ifthe value read from Pr 297 is between 0 to 4 registration of the password is completed normally 102 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 8 Programming Inverter operation monitoring instruction This instruction reads the operation status of an inverter For information concerning inverter communication instruction expressions and execution format refer to LLJProgramming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks ENO IVCK EN s1 s2 n d1 d2 Setting data Contents range data type en anv n Used channel 0 channel ANY16_U d2 Lr MUN bit device number to which instruction execution status is ANYBIT ARRAY output Number of elements 3 1 Specify a channel No for which communication setting is set for inverter communication 2 Make sure not to use devices being used in other control operations Page 98 BApplicable devices en E E jJo X o Jo j fo s Jo e kE Jo fe Plk kb o ff f o FO fF Jo p w b fe e bbi m Jot Je
241. on instructions execute several send receives The following table shows the number of send receives in each instruction Inverter communication instruction Number of send receives per instruction IVCK 1 IVDR 1 IVRD Change of the 2nd parameter is unnecessary Change of the 2nd parameter is necessary IVWR Change of the 2nd parameter is unnecessary WINI Ww ND Change of the 2nd parameter is necessary IVBWR Number of times of communication s2 s2 x 2 Number of parameters requiring change of the 2nd parameter IVMC 1 2 For parameters requiring change of the 2nd parameter refer to L Page 117 Second parameter specification code 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 4 Specifications 73 14 method The required time Tinv for inverter communication instruction in units of ms is calculated as follows INT n in the calculation formula indicates an integer obtained by truncating decimal places of n llLength of 1 character In inverter communication the communication setting is as shown in the following table The length of 1 character is as shown in the following expression Length of 1 character Start bit Data length Parity bit Stop bit 10 bit Total 10 llTime required for inverter communication instructions The time required for inverter communication instructions is calculated based on the following expression Tinv T1 T2 T3 Z 1 M T17 INT E TE 1 x Scan time ms T2 n x 1
242. onitor M100 to M107 Status details Reverse rotation as needed M102 Alarm occurrence M107 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 104 4 8 Programming Inverter operation control instruction This instruction writes an inverter operation required set value to an inverter For information concerning inverter communication instruction expressions and execution format refer to LLJProgramming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks ENO IVDR EN s1 s2 s3 n d Setingdala llContents range data type s1 Inverter station number KO to 31 16 bit signed binary ANY16 s2 Inverter instruction codes Refer to K gt Page 72 16 bit signed binary ANY16 s3 Set value to be written to the inverter parameter or device 16 bit signed binary ANY16 number storing the data to be set n Used channel K1 to 4 16 bit unsigned binary ANY16 U d 2 Bit device head number to which instruction execution status is Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY output Number of elements 3 1 Specify a channel No for which communication setting is set for inverter communication 2 Make sure not to use devices being used in other control operations Page 98 BApplicable devices en i E o o ee r lo jo en f e ee deek o f e J j o o bk o ff o oS de e GSS a jJ i e e Jot fe OM o e el 1 LSTand C cannot be used 2 Bitspecification
243. or flag turns ON when an operation error occurs in the S P CPRTCL instruction Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON SMO Latest self diagnostic error Turns ON when an operation error occurs Including the annunciator ON SM1 Latest self diagnostic error Not including the annunciator ON SM56 SM8067 Operation error MError codes When the operation error flag turns ON the error code hexadecimal is stored in the operation error code SDO SD8067 The error codes stored in the device are shown as follows 2220H The parameter contents are corrupted Write the project again detected 2221H Parameter The parameter setting value exceeded the available range Correct the setting value of the parameter and write the 2222H error project again 2250H Module Any of the following errors exists in the written module Check the predefined protocol setting in protocol extended extended parameter setting setting data error SD9120 to 9123 and correct the parameter error The predefined protocol setting has an error setting Then write the setting to the CPU module The data for the set item is corrupted and execute the S P CPRTCL instruction e If this error persists even after the data is rewritten replace the module 2820H Invalid device The device used for operands of the instruction exceeded the Check the device range and correct the program designation device range 3100H Instruction The program co
244. or occurs in serial communication These flags are for check of the serial communication error SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication Devices do not go OFF even when normal communication is restored R Read only After the devices above turns ON the error code is stored in the compatible devices below v uu v code Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored Serial communication errordoes not turn OFF even if the communication comes back to normal The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF ON system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON n mber setting latch setting valid flag When latch for the station number setting set in the parameter is latch these flags turn ON when power supply ON OFF or when system is reset In that case the station number set in SD8740 SD8750 SD8760 SD8770 turns valid When latch not required for the station number setting set in the parameter is no latch these flags turn OFF when power supply ON OFF or when system is reset In that case a station number set in the parameter turns valid In addition this device holds its status even when the power is turned OFF ON or system is reset SM8740 R Read only Precauions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool Sto
245. or the shield of one side of the cable ground resistance 100 Q or less For details on connection refer to K Page 84 Connection diagram Connection diagram A800 F700P A700 series BiBuilt in RS 485 terminal e When one inverter is connected Set the termination resistor selector Built in RS 485 port switch to 110 Q FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Twisted pair cable 0 3 mm or more Set the termination resistor selector switch to 100 Q Inverter 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring e When multiple up to 16 inverters are connected Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q Set the termination resistor selector switch of the farthest inverter to 100 Q Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD Twisted pair cable 0 3 mm or more Class D grounding p Connect to RDA1 and RDB1 in next inverter Connect to SDA and SDB in PLC Connect to SDA1 and SDB1 in next inverter Connect to RDA and RDB in PLC Connect to SG in next inverter Connect to SG in PLc 4 F700PJ E700 E700EX D700 V500 series BPU connector When one inverter is connected 4 wire type Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD we FX5 485ADP Distributor Connect a termination resistor of 100 Q 1 2 W not supplied When seen from inverter front receptacle side 8 PU RS 485 Connec
246. order is different from the data area Receive data Range of data stored in data n ue registers within the upper limit of number of devices bytes to be Not stored in Receiving received that is specified by n2 data registers completed SM8562 a Set when receiving is completed Reset it in the program Cleared when header is received Cleared when the receiving complete flag is cleared Amount of data already received SD8561 The calculation result is converted into ASCII codes and compared Increments each time data is received Receiving sum 00H 35H 6BH A2H DAH EAH EDH calculation result SD8564 Precautions The higher order 8 bits of data of the receive data storage destination device holds the data previously received OOH s n1 1 SM8561 SM857 1 SM8581 When sending of the data is completed the sending request flag is automatically set to OFF Send request flag SM8591 llTime at which sending is started When RS2 instruction is executed after the sending request flag is set to ON the PLC starts to send When sending is started the PLC sends the data specified by RS2 instruction in interrupt processing regardless of the operation cycle llTime at which sending is completed When all send data is sent sending is completed 1 The terminators sum check and CR LF co
247. otocol N N Network Communication Non protocol Communication Inverter Communication 9 MODBUS RTU Communication 12 Predefined protocol support Other than above Not used R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 9 Related Devices 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION This chapter explains inverter communication 4 1 _ Function Outline Inverter communication function allows connection between an FX5 PLC and up to 16 inverters through RS 485 communication and monitors operations of inverters gives various commands to inverters and reads and writes inverter parameters Mitsubishi general purpose inverters FREQROL A800 F700PJ F700P A700 E700 E700EX sensor less servo D700 V500 Series can be linked Inverter operations can be monitored various commands can be given and parameters can be read or written The overall distance is 1200 m maximum Applies only when configured with FX5 485ADP Up to 16 units 1200 m 50 m when the built in RS 485 port or FX5 485 BD is used FX5 PLC Inverter Inverter Built in RS 485 port Built in Built in RS 485 port RS 485 port Master station Station No Station No n 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 1 Function Outline 69 4 2 Procedure before Operation The flow chart below shows the Inverter Communication setting and sequence programs creation procedure until data link 1
248. p to 16 inverters are connected Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Twisted pair cable 0 3 mm or more l Connect a termination resistor connection piece to the most distant ur DR JN i inverter let LN i t Class D FR ASNR Inverter FR A5NR Inverter FR A5NR Inverter T For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to case of one inverter for the connection diagram Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below e Perform Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding cannot be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the following LAFX5U User s manual Hardware L LIFX5UC User s manual Hardware Other Other Q O E O Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 2 mm or larger e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring 89 90 4 6 Inverter Communication Settings Before connecting an inverter to a PLC set parameters related to communication in the inverter parameter unit PU in advance For details on each function ref
249. pansion d1 1 output frequency rotation speed for inverter station No 0 from FX5 PLC CH1 Send receive type code H0000 e s3 Run command expansion Runs inverter in forward or reverse by forward rotation command M21 reverse rotation command M22 Writing contents D10 run command M21 forward rotation M22 reverse rotation s3 1 Set frequency RAM Switches speed 1 40 Hz speed 2 20 Hz with 60 Hz as the initial value when starting up Writing contents D11 operation speed initial value 60 Hz speed 1 40 Hz speed 2 20 Hz d1 Inverter status monitor expansion Stores read value in M100 M115 and outputs externally YO to Y3 Read contents D20 inverter monitor expansion inverter running M100 forward rotation M101 reverse rotation M102 error M115 d1 1 Output frequency speed Reads output frequency rotation speed Read contents D21 Output frequency rotation speed 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 11 4 8 Programming 9 RUN monitor SM400 MOVP K6000 Switch command Speed 1 M10 Switch command Speed 2 M20 MOVP D11 Switch Switch command command Speed 2 Speed 1 M20 M10 D11 Operation stop MOVP K2000 command XO SET 15 Forward rotation Operation stop command X1 command XO l Reverse rotation command X2 Forward Reverse rotation rotation Operation command command stop M15 X1 X2 wet Reverse rotation Forward rotation
250. pdate for the device above the range upper limit 3 When the link device of the local station is out of the device range by changing the slave station number The error code 7715H is stored in SD of the local station of SD8212 to SD8218 and SD9062 to SD9068 However devices above the range upper limit send all O word 0 bit OFF Also when the error 7705H of 2 occurs at the same time 7715H is stored 2 8 Troubleshooting This section explains troubleshooting For the troubleshooting of FX3 Series refer to the following manual LLIFX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Checking communication status based on LED indication Check the status of the LED indications of RD and SD on the CPU module or the communication board communication adapter LED status Operation status RD The data is being sent or received Off The data is received but is not sent The data is being sent but is not received O 5 5 5 Off Off The data is not being sent or received While N N Network is executed normally both LEDs flash brightly If the LED are not flashing check the wiring master station or other slave station setting Checking installation and wiring Connection status The communication cannot be operated if the PLC and the communication board communication adapter are not connected correctly For the connection procedure refer to the following LAFX5U User s manual Hardware LAFX5UC User s ma
251. pleted While the receiving completed flag is ON the PLC cannot receive new data When the receiving completed flag is reset the PLC waits to receive the state where it can receive data 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 148 5 Programming Half duplex bi directional communication operation Send completed start send operation When sending of the data is completed the sending request flag is automatically set to OFF When RS2 instruction is executed again after the sending request flag is set to ON the PLC starts to send Send completed start receive operation For the operation timing of send completed and start receive refer to the following e Operation during data send K Page 146 e Operation during data receive Page 147 However leave 100 us or more time between send completed start receive llReceive completed start send operation For the operation timing of send completed and start receive refer to the following e Operation during data send K Page 146 e Operation during data receive Page 147 llReceive completed start receive operation Receiving completed flag turns ON when receiving is completed While the receiving completed flag is ON the PLC cannot receive new data When the receiving completed flag is reset the next PLC waits to receive the state where it can receive data Sum check code The sum check code is a two digit ASCII code converted from the least significant byte 8 bit o
252. points Reads data in 1 bit unit from a device indirectly specified in the index register BIN 3584 points 0080H Reads data in 1 word unit from buffer memory of intelligent unit 960 words 15360 points Reads data in 1 word unit from a device indirectly specified in the index register 0083H Reads data in 1 bit unit from buffer memory of intelligent unit ASCII 3584 points Reads data in 1 bit unit from a device indirectly specified in the index register BIN 3584 points 0082H Reads data in 1 word unit from buffer memory of intelligent unit 960 words 15360 points Reads data in 1 word unit from a device indirectly specified in the index register Batch writing 1401H 0001H Writes data in 1 bit units to bit devices ASCII 3584 points Device Write BIN 3584 points 0000H Writes data in 16 bit units to bit devices 960 words 15360 points Writes data in 1 word units to bit devices Batch reading 0401H 0001H Reads data in 1 point units from bit devices or word devices ASCII 3584 points Device Read BIN 3584 points 0081H Writes data in 1 bit unit to MC protocol compatible devices or buffer memory of ASCII 3584 points intelligent unit BIN 3584 points Indirectly specifies bit devices word devices and buffer memory in the index register 0080H Writes data in 1 word 16 bits unit to MC protocol compatible devices or buffer 960 words 15360 points memory of intelligent unit 0083H Writes data
253. port of the CPU module Generic term for FX5 Series built in RS 485 port CH1 communication board CH2 communication adapter 1 CH3 and communication adapter 2 CH4 4 ports Generic term for device with which communication is conducted PC indicators etc 1 OUTLINE The table below shows the serial communication types supported by the FX5 N N Network Up to eight PLCs are connected and data is automatically transferred among them Page 14 MC protocol MC protocol is used to access CPU module and external devices PC GOT etc from equipment that supports Page 48 MC protocol via Ethernet or serial communication The serial port of the FX5 is capable of communication with MC protocol 3C 4C frame Inverter communication An FX PLC can control up to 16 inverters via RS 485 communication Page 69 Non protocol Non protocol serial communication is available between an FX PLC and RS 232C RS 485 interface equipment Page 128 communication such as bar code reader printer personal computer and measuring instrument Predefined protocol Data can be sent and received between the counterpart device and CPU module with a protocol appropriate to Page 165 suppor the counterpart device such as measuring instrument or barcode reader 1 OUTLINE 13 2 N N NETWORK This chapter explains the N N Network 2 1 Outline of System N N Network allows connection of up to eight FX5 PLCs or FX3 PLCs via mutually linked devices
254. positions in the data portion BITo place Conversion variable in receive packet Multiple conversion variable elements can be placed in one packet in the cases not corresponding to 1 2 and 3 e Variable number of data Only one Conversion variable can be placed in one packet and either of the following 1 or 2 need to be met 1 For discerning the data length of a Conversion variable any of the following items is placed immediately after the conversion variable Static data Terminator Check code Static data Check code Terminator 2 Length is placed before a Conversion variable The Conversion variable needs to be included in the calculating range e Fixed number of data ll Variable number of digits 3 When the number of data is 2 or more or the number of data is 1 with no delimiter only one conversion variable can be placed in a packet and it needs to be placed in the order mentioned in variable number of data 4 When a Conversion variable the number of data is 1 with delimiter and variable number of digits and the following four elements are placed in the same packet these four elements need to be placed behind the Conversion variable the number of data is 1 with delimiter and variable number of digits Conversion variable variable number of data Conversion variable fixed number of data and variable number of digits The case of 3 Excluding the case where Number of Send Data is 1 a
255. pt processing Because the interrupt processing is generated asynchronously from operations of the sequence program it may be performed during ladder operation However the update processing of the sent data from the slave stations are executed by the END process of each station Therefore the change of link device value during the ladder operation is not reflected on the communication data until the END process starts 2 N N NETWORK 2 Programming Precaution when changing the station number and number of slave stations Only when the station number and number of slave stations are set with latch setting can the setting values be written to the corresponding word device from a program or an engineering tool and the setting be changed by powering OFF gt ON or a system reset However be careful not to exceed the range upper limit of device for link device when you set the device head number When the device range upper limit is exceeded the operation is as follows 1 When the number of slave stations is increased and the master station link device is insufficient The error code 7705H is stored in SD8211 SD9061 However link continues but it does not update for the device above the range upper limit 2 When the number of slave stations is increased and the slave station link device is insufficient The error code 7705H is stored in SD of the local station of SD8212 to SD8218 and SD9062 to SD9068 However link continues but it does not u
256. pter to the left of the CPU 1200 m or less agapier FX5 232ADP module 15 m or less 1 Assigned to CH3 or CH4 in order of proximity to CPU module Built in RS 485 port 3 PE pex aene m P E E E SEE E EA N laa a nnrtant nninte Ter calartinn 1 JUI Lal It KM OIr Ils IOI gt electic Hl F z i pm cct METTI e iH DOr 3 3 MC PROTOCOL 49 3 2 Procedures before Operation 90 3 4 Specifications Communication specifications Communication is executed within the specifications shown in the table below Set the baud rate etc in the parameter settings of an engineering tool Items Specifications Remarks Number of connectable units 16 maximum Transmission standard RS 485 or RS 232C standard Maximum total extension distance RS 485 Distance varies depending on communication When FX5 485ADP is used 1200 m or less equipment type e When using built in RS 485 port or FX5 485 BD 50m or less RS 232C 15 m or less Protocol type MC protocol dedicated protocol 3C 4C frame There are format1 format4 formatb Control procedure Communication method Half duplex bidirectional communication Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 bps Character Fixed fons 7 bits 8 bits None odd or even 1 bit 2 bits Header Fixed Terminator Fixed Control line RS 485 None RS 232C Provided Sum check Provided or not provided Link specifications Link time llData transf
257. quipment The specifications of the cables used in wiring are shown MRS 485 cable specifications Cable type Shielded cable Number of pairs 2p 3p Conductor resistance 20 C 88 0 Q km or less Insulation resistance 10000 MO km or more Voltage resistance 500 V DC 1minute Electrostatic capacitance 1 kHz 60 nF km or less by an average Characteristic impedance 100 kHz 1104 10 Q lliCable structural drawing reference Example of three pair cable structural drawing ng cables The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port One wire 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 22 to 0 25 N m AWG24 to 20 AWG24 to 20 came awe FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port One wire 0 3 to 0 5 mm 0 3 to 0 5 mm FX5 485 BD AWG22 to 20 AWG22 to 20 ee omm eB 2 N N NETWORK 1 2 5 Wiring 9 20 Do not tighten terminal screws with torque beyond the specified range Otherwise it may cause equipment failure or malfunction Wire end treatment With regard to the cable end treatment use a stranded cable or solid cable as is or use a wire ferrule with insulating sleeve When using a stranded cable or solid cable as is Twist the end of stranded wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Please do not solder plate the ends of the cable c cz ai 5 mm 9 mm 0 2 0 36 When using a wire ferrule with insulation sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a
258. quipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the user s discretion 235 TRADEMARKS Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company 236 Manual number JY997D55901B Model FX5 U SC E Model code 09R540 When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA MACHI HIMEJI JAPAN Specifications are subject to change without notice
259. r is different from the data area Receive data Sum check code target Low order bits of D200 35H High order bits of D200 36H Low order bits of D201 37H High order bits of D201 38H Low order bits of D202 10H High order bits of D202 03H EDH 4544H Converted into ASCII codes Comparison Operation of control line RS 232C RS 232C communication is full duplex bi directional communication When using half duplex bi directional communication pay attention not to turn ON the sending request flag while receiving If set to ON the PLC starts to send and as a result the counterpart equipment may not be able to receive data and the sent and received data may be destroyed In full duplex bi directional communication the sending wait flag does not turn ON However in the case that control is standard mode or interlink mode the sending wait flag remains ON while DR DSR is OFF and the PLC is waiting to send Control line not used RS2 instruction execution l l SD TXD Message Message Message Send data Y 1 f 3 f Y 5 i NI A NI EZ N ON ON ON OFF ON JY Reset the flag from the program This flag must be turned off to receive the next data OFF ON Sending request OFF RD RXD Receive data Receiving complete flag r amp Start of waiting status A for receiving 150 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 Programming Normal mode Use this mode for only sending or only recei
260. racters Element Name Displays the element name Displays the element name element name Element Setting The setting of each element is displayed Click an item to display each setting window O Necessity X Not necessity 1 These items can be set when the project is changed to an editable project on the protocol setting screen Header Use this element when a specific code or character string exists at the head of a packet e When sending Sends a specified code and character string When receiving Verifies a header and received data Input Control Code Setting Range 1 to 50 cm Element Name Set the name of the element Code Type Select a data type of the setting value ASCII String ASCII Control Code HEX Setting Value Set data within 1 to 50 bytes Setting example The setting ranges that can be set for each code type are as follows ASCII String ABC 20H to 7EH ASCII Control Code STX HEX FFFF ASCII String ASCII Control Code 00H to 1FH and control code of 7FH e HEX hexadecimal data of OOH to FFH 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 77 6 7 Packet Setting ies gt onsiderations for configuring packet element Only one header can be used in a packet A header can be set only at the head of a packet Data area pee C99 I J 0 LOL be Terminator Use this element when a code or character string indicating the end of the packet is
261. res the error code for serial communication Page 64 SD8500 SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored R Read only Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Serial communication errors are not cleared even after communication has recovered its normal status Cleared the devices when power is turned OFF ON system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON 3 MC PROTOCOL 3 9 Related Devices Stores the set communication parameter in the communication settings when turning OFF ON the PLC power or resetting the system Page 57 Communication Setting SD8502 SD8512 SD8522 SD8532 Stores the setting of the communication parameter R R Read only The descriptions of the communication parameters are as follows b1 Parity bit b2 b1 b2 0 0 Not provided 0 1 Odd 1 1 Even b4 Baud rate b7 b6 b5 b4 b5 0 0 1 1 300 bps b6 0 1 0 0 600bps b7 0 1 0 1 1200 bps 0 1 1 0 2400bps 0 1 1 1 4800bps 1 0 0 0 9600bps 1 0 0 1 19200bps 1 0 1 0 38400bps 1 0 1 1 57600bps 1 1 0 0 76800bps 1 1 0 1 115200bps Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool When SD latch setting is set to no latch a station number of a local station that is set in the engineering tool and used in MC protocol station numbers 0 15 00H to OFH is stored when the power supply is turned
262. responding to each protocol number is turned R on or off 17 to 32 bO to b15 SD9134 A bit corresponding to each protocol number is turned R on or off 33 to 48 bO to b15 SD9135 A bit corresponding to each protocol number is turned R on or off 49 to 64 bO to b15 R Read only The following table lists protocol numbers corresponding to bits of each device SD9132 SD9133 SD9134 SD9135 1 When a protocol setting data error has occurred 0 is stored in all these areas Do not change the value with program or engineering tool 208 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 10 Related Devices The status of a protocol in execution is stored For details refer to Page 193 SD9150 SD9170 SD9190 SD9210 Unexecuted Waiting for transmission Sending Waiting for data reception Receiving Completed O AONO R Read only Precautions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool The cumulative number of executions of a protocol is stored Even when a protocol was executed and an error occurred this execution is also counted and cumulated The number of executions is reset to O by turning off and on the power supply or resetting the system and 1 is added every time each protocol is started SD9168 SD9188 SD9208 SD9228 0 to 65535 R Read only 1 When cumulated 65535 or more 65535 is stored Do not change the value with program
263. ring setting Caution for setting the PU communication check time interval Pr 122 During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed 9999 periodically When communication with the PLC is not executed 0 Set the communication time in the following cases 1 to 9998 When it is necessary to monitor absence of communication for a certain time and stop the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed continuously When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point when the PLC mode is changed from RUN STOP n set as needed The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configurations and inverters For the method of use refer to L 1 1the V500 series inverter manual 0 EEPROM is written 1 RAM is written Communication EEPROM write 0 or 1 selection 4 PLC Communication settings For the FX5 communication settings of this function parameters are set using GX Works3 For details about GX Works3 refer to LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual Setting of parameter differs according to the module used The procedure for each module is as follows 485 port CH1 TZ Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt 485 Serial Port The following screen will be displayed if Inverter Communication is set for the communication protocol type llBasic Settings E Gemmuntcation Prrteca Type Scere piri Bes e C
264. ring tool Data transfer sequence error count does not turn OFF even if the communication comes back to normal The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF gt ON STOP gt RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices These devices store the error code K Page 35 of the master station or the slave stations FX5 only SD9068 D8218 SD9061 SD9062 SD9063 SD9064 SD9065 SD9066 SD9067 SD8211 SD8212 SD8213 SD8214 SD8215 SD8216 SD8217 FX3 Series compatible R Read only Precauions Data transfer sequence errors in a station itself cannot be detected Do not change the value with program or engineering tool Data transmission error code does not turn OFF even if the communication comes back to normal The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF ON STOP9RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON Stores the communication function code that serial communication is being used SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 SD8419 SD8439 R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool SD8503 0 MELSOFT Connection 2 MC protocol 3 N N Network Communication 5 Non protocol Communication T Inverter Communication 9 MODBUS RTU Communication 12 Predefined protocol support Other than above Not used 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices 47 4
265. rk The FX3 Series compatible device operates only the channel which is specified in the SM SD settings Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication These flags are for check of the serial communication error SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 SM8063 SM8438 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication R Read only After the devices above turns ON the error code is stored in the compatible devices below SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 SD8063 SD8438 Error code number of serial communication error Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool Serial communication error does not turn OFF even if the communication comes back to normal The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF gt ON STOPRUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error occurs in the master station or slave station FX5 only SM9040 SM9041 SM9042 SM9043 SM9044 SM9045 SM9046 SM9047 SM8183 SM8184 SM8185 SM8186 SM8187 SM8188 SM8189 SM8190 After the devices above turn ON the error code is stored in the corresponding devices below data transfer sequence error FX3 Series compatible R Read only FX5 only SD9068 D8218 SD9061 SD9062 SD9063 SD9064 SD9065 SD9066 SD9067 SD8211 SD8212 SD8213 SD8214 SD8215 SD8216 SD8217 Precauions
266. rmation gt Right click gt Add New Module After adding the expansion adapter make settings on the screen displayed from the following operation XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt Module Information gt ADP1 to ADP6 Communication adapter gt Module Parameter Each setting screen is the same as in the case of built in RS 485 port CH1 Parameter setting details Set the following items for serial ports that use inverter communication Basic Settings Extended Board When using this function select FX5 485 BD Communication Protocol Type When using this function select Inverter Communication Advanced Settings Data Length 7bit 8bit Parity Bit None Odd Even Stop Bit 1bit 2bit Baud Rate 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Fixed Setting Response Waiting Time 1 to 32767 ms SM SD Setting FX3 Series Compatibility SM SD for Compatible Disable CH1 CH2 Refer to the following 1 Only in the case of communication board CH2 96 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 7 PLC Communication settings The following settings are unnecessary fixed values Items Description Start Bit 1 bit Header Not Added Terminator Not Added Control Mode None Sum Check Code Not Added Control Procedure None FX3 Series compatible SM SD When using the FX3 Series compatible SM SD storage area set to use special devices for either the FX3 Series CH1 or CH2 FX3 Series compatible devices corresponding
267. ror Slave station 5 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 6 Data transfer sequence error Slave station 7 Data transfer sequence ON R Read only M Master station station number 0 L Slave station station number 1 to 7 2 N N NETWORK 2 9 Related Devices 37 MIF X5 only SD9040 Station number settings Provided to check the station number M L O status Station 1 to 7 SD9041 Number of slave stations Provided to check the number of slave stations M L O setting status Station 1 to 7 SD8500 Serial communication error When an error occurs in the serial communication of CH1 M L O code CH1 the error code is stored Station 1 to 7 SD8502 Serial communication Stores the set communication parameter in the PLC of CH1 M L O settings CH1 Station 1 to 7 SD8503 Serial communication Stores the communication function that serial communication M L O operation mode CH1 of CH1 being used Station 1 to 7 SD8510 Serial communication error Stores the error code when an error occurs in the serial M L O code CH2 communication of CH2 Station 1 to 7 SD8512 Serial communication Stores the set communication parameter in the PLC of CH2 M L O settings CH2 Station 1 to 7 SD8513 Serial communication Stores the communication function that serial communication M L O operation mode CH2 of CH2 being used Station 1 to 7 SD8520 Serial communication error Stores the error code when an error occurs in the
268. rror does not occur It takes about 2 2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset 2 When resetting the inverter please specify H9696 as the operand s3 of the IVDR instruction Do not use H9966 3 Please set 0 to instruction code HFF Link parameter expansion setting just before the IVDR instruction when writing frequency When 0 is not set writing of the frequency may not be executed normally For inverter parameters which can be changed read write refer to LAthe manual for each particular inverter 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 4 Specifications Time required for inverter communication instructions Outline The period of time after one inverter communication instruction is driven until communication with the inverter is completed SM8029 turns ON is considered as the required time for the inverter communication instruction as shown XO SM8029 MO SM8029 Tinv gt Communication end processing lt T1 First send receive of Second send receive of the instruction the instruction N th send receive of the instruction Communication preparation processing lt T4 oO T5 gt lt Ton i mes Request E 1 nverter 1 message 2 i creation Tz n gt lt Te n 1 gt lt To n 1 gt is being sent A being received 1 The time required for the n th time send receive of the instruction Some inverter communicati
269. rror in slave station No 0 SM9040 When a link error occurs in the station No 0 YO is Data transfer set to ON sequence error in slave station No 2 SM9042 Cu When a link error occurs in the station No 2 Y1 is set to ON Data transfer processing SM9056 While the N N Network is executed YO10 remains Program for writing link devices slave station master or slave station This program is required to write information from a slave station to the master station or another slave XO station M4064 The information from XO is written to M4064 link device X2 Goss The information from X2 is written to M4065 link device M10 M4066 The information from M10 is written to M4066 link device RUN monitor SM400 The information from M100 to M115 is written to ARAS i i UNA M4070 to M4085 link devices MOV 0 D1010 The information from DO is written to D1010 link device n pattern O bit devices cannot be used Use the word devices instead 2 N N NETWORK 1 2 Programming 3 32 Program for reading link devices slave station master or slave station This program is required to read information from the master station or another slave station to a slave Data transfer station sequence error in Monitor link errors in each slave station and read slave station No O them SM9040 M4000 The information from M4000 link device is read to MO M4001 The information from M4001 link
270. rrr 111 Multiple inverter commands llllseeeeee ee eee ns 114 CONTENTS 4 9 Lll ridge Mer 119 Checking communication status based on LED display 0 0 00 eee eee 119 Checking metalams 225 42 44 53 ee tba beens eaece E eee ee pees bee obese es 120 Checking sequence program 2 0 ce ee eee hh hs 120 Checking the communication settings llli 120 Checking absence presence of errors llli ns 120 4 10 Related D8VICOS codon impu RE ce E RCRCRCEDR CR eda acia cee OECD wd cR ee od d ar ede ee eee an 123 List of related devices 1 hrs 123 Details of related devices llle 124 CHAPTER5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 128 5 1 Funcion SUMMA CLIE 128 5 2 Procedure before OperaliOh u 3 6 barriro de eR aci E ERE e RC eee acc CR doin ded Most wc A 129 5 3 System COonfIQUEaltlOl a acida caca iC BOR Eq cease oh e d a e c ORE eee Resear ew aad 129 5 4 SDCCINCANONS Se PD 130 5 5 ld PU UTTTTUUTITTUPUTMMT 131 l aduseleer e MM age ea be te ee ee ee eS oes eb eee ees 131 s TI rrpPvPET 131 Termination resistor setting nannaa hrs 133 Connection diagraii 2424244446 93312134299 25 X EE EESRSSA beeen SHS A OS RE DG PHA C a ROR 134 ISIOUNCING 2 4 65 nus duo rue eid EN bende ee E T T E RES Nd Mp Maid dus d E dd Ea Edda E Be 136 5 6 Communication Settings 0 ce eer
271. s 12 ms 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 4 Specifications 795 76 Calculation example This is a calculation example for the following communication settings and scan time when communicating with an inverter Communication speed 19200 bps Length of 1 character 10 bit Scan time 10 ms Calculation example 1 Calculation of required time when Pr 3 is read by the IVRD instruction TinvzT4 T5 T357181 ms T 10 ms T3 1 ms Calculate T5 as follows because Pr 3 does not require change of the 2nd parameter T222x Ta Ts Tot Te 22x 80 10 30 60 170 ms Sonde ves ae a Ta INT E 1 x 10 INT 75 1 x 10 30 ms Ts INT 1 x 10 10 ms Te 1 INT ETS 4 x 10 INT x 10 INT P 1 x10 10 30 ms T7 1 Ts 1 Te 1 7 8 12 19 8 ms T7 1 T9 1 x 11 4 x 10 x 1000 7 8 ms Te 1 12 ms T2 INT AEE TEL BEST a x 10 INT 1 x10 INT t T7 2 Ta 2 To 2 10 4 30 40 4 ms T7 2 T9 2 x 9 11 x 10 x 1000 10 4 ms T8 2 30 ms Tinv T1 T2 T3 10 170 1 181 ms llCalculation example 2 Calculation of required time when Pr 902 is read by the IVRD instruction Tinv T4 T5 T3 251 ms T 10 ms T3 1 ms Calculate T5 as follows because Pr 902 does not require change of the 2nd parameter T2 3x T4 Ts Toft Te2 Te 3 3 x 30 10 30 30 60 240 ms 19200 1 x10 10 60
272. s according to the module used The procedure for each module is as follows Built in RS 485 port CH1 TZ Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU Module Parameter gt 485 Serial Port The following screen will be displayed if Predefined Protocol Support Function is set for the communication protocol type llBasic Settings E Communication Prateca Type Set communication protocol type Communication Protocol Type Predefined Protocol Support Function E Advanced Settings aet detailed setting Data Length ibit Parity Bit Odd Stop Bit Ibit Baud Rate 115 200bps 1 68 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 5 Communication Settings Communication board CH2 TZ Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt Extended Board The following screen will be displayed if FX5 232 BD or FX5 485 BD is set for the extended board and Predefined Protocol Support Function is set for the communication protocol type llBasic Settings E Extended Board Set the extended board type im Extended Board FX5 485 BD E Communication Protocol Type Setcommunication protocol type Communication Protocol Type Predefined Protocol Support Function g Advanced Settings Set detailed setting iu Data Length ibit Parity Bit Odd Stop Bit Ibit Baud Rate 115 200bps Communication adapter CH3 CH4 When an expansion adapter is used add expansion adapter to Module Information
273. s any of up to 16 registered receive packets Send Displays the packet direction Receive e Send gt Receive n n receive packet number 1 to 16 Packet Name Displays the packet name Packet Setting Displays the existence or non existence of variables in an element and set or unset of the variables With Variable Unset Element Unset or Element error the settings cannot be written to a CPU module or SD memory card No Variable There is no variable in the element Variable Set All variables are set Variable Unset There are one or more unset variables Element Unset There is no element in the editable protocol Element error The element does not meet requirement 1 70 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 6 Protocol Setting The procedure to set a protocol on the protocol setting screen is as follows 1 Adding protocols Select or create a protocol from libraries L Page 171 Adding protocols 2 Configuring detailed setting of protocols Set the information and operation of protocols KL Page 172 Configuring detailed setting of protocols 3 Setting packets Set the packets of protocols K Page 176 Packet Setting Adding protocols Add or create a protocol from the predefined protocol library or user protocol library Add a protocol on the screen displayed by the following operation X Protocol setting screen gt Edit gt Add Protocol Adds new protocol Selection of Protocol T
274. s been written is stored SD9120 Predefined protocol setting When a protocol setting data error was detected information to data error information identify the error position is stored Protocol No A SD9121 Predefined protocol setting data error information Setting type SD9122 Predefined protocol setting data error information Packet No SD9123 Predefined protocol setting data error information Element No SD9124 Number of registered The number of registered protocol setting data is stored R predefined protocols SD9132 SD9133 SD9134 SD9135 Predefined protocol Protocol The ON OFF state of the bit corresponding to a protocol number registration rii whether the protocol setting data has been registered or SD9150 SD9170 SD9190 SD9210 Protocol execution status The status of a protocol in execution is stored SD9168 SD9188 SD9208 SD9228 Protocol execution count execution count The cumulative number of executions ofa protocol is stored cumulative number of executions of a The cumulative number of executions ofa protocol is stored is stored SD9169 ELE E ET cancel specification The protocol in execution can be cancelled with a value to be stored R W in this area SD9230 SD9240 SD9250 SD9260 Send receive data monitoring The setting of the send receive data monitoring function is stored function setting SD9231 SD9241 SD9251 SD9261 Send receive data monitoring The opt
275. s checked whether or not the received sum is equivalent to the sum calculated by the PLC BCR LF When the control procedure is selected as CR LF provided in the communication settings Page 136 the character code of CR LF is added at the end of the send data When data is received receiving is completed when CR LF is received continuously However receiving is also completed when the specified amount of received data is received or when data receiving is suspended and the specified time out occurs Make sure that CR is not included in the message 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 141 5 Programming Function and operation RS2 instruction specifies head device of the send data no of data head device for storing the received data the maximum no of data that can be received Create a program as shown below Drive E d Cw oo w oo en ao e When the drive contact MO is set to ON the PLC waits for sending and receiving TEST SEND1 D100 Sending command pulse operation type M1 MOV Program example for writing send data When the sending command M1 is set to ON write the send data from D100 onwards for no of devices specified Issue the sending command as a pulse In the example above write send character string TEST SEND1 in D100 onwards and store number of characters of the send character string 10 in DO e After writing the send data set the sending request SM856
276. s communicating via communication is turned ON this synchronizes with it and turns ON While the carrier detection flag is ON data can be sent and received Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool o These devices turn ON OFF in synchronization with the DR DSR signal The state of DR DSR signal can be checked when executing RS2 instruction SM8564 When the DR DSR signal of the counterpart device that is communicating via communication is turned ON this synchronizes with it and turns ON SM8574 SM8584 SM8594 SM8405 SM84251 R Read only 1 The device is updated during END processing Precauions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool Time out flag This turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not received within the time set by the time out time setting device SM8575 SM8585 SM8595 SM8409 SM8429 R Read only SM8565 This turns ON when receiving is not restarted within the specified time out time setting when data receiving is interrupted The time out time corresponding to the above devices is stored in the following devices SD8631 SD8641 SD8651 SD8409 SD8429 SD8621 1 to 32767 ms 10 ms when set to a value outside the range 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 5 9 Related Devices 59 The time out flag turns OFF when the PLC waits to receive Using this function the PLC can
277. s greater than that specified in Data Length digits greater than the specified digit are omitted ignored Ex When 2 bytes is specified in Data Length and the calculation result is 123 bytes the data length is considered as 23 e When any Non conversion variable Variable length Conversion variable Variable number of data Conversion variable Fixed number of data Variable number of digits or Non verified reception Variable number of characters is placed behind Length and they are not included in the calculating range of the Length place any of the following data immediately after the Non conversion variable Variable length Conversion variable Variable length or Non verified reception Static Data Terminator Check code Static Data Check code Terminator When Code Type is ASCII Hexadecimal a corresponding packet is regarded as a mismatch packet if a string other than O to 9 Ato F and a to f is received When Code Type is ASCII Decimal a corresponding packet is regarded as a mismatch packet if a string other than 0 to 9 is received 1 Excluding the case where number of send data is 1 and delimiter is not no delimiter Static Data Use this element when a specific code or character string such as command exists in a packet When sending Sends a specified code and character string When receiving Verifies the received data Window Element Setting Static Data Send
278. s in the manual Tighten the screws using a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 shaft diameter 6mm 0 24 or less Make sure that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block Make sure to wire the terminal block European type in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the FX5 User s Manual Hardware Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the FX5 User s Manual Hardware Twist the ends of stranded wires and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed IWIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION e Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to terminal blocks power connectors I O connectors communication connectors or communication cables Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due to malfunction of the PLC caused by abnormal data written to the PLC due to the effects of noise 1 Do not
279. s received Check the data sent from the counterpart device error Divide the packet data into several parts and send them separately 7D18H Insufficient digit When data is received using a protocol including a packet that Check the data sent from the counterpart device number error contains conversion variable variable number of data the Check the packet format of the counterpart device to corresponding data is insufficient confirm that the number of digits is set correctly 7D19H Abnormal digit When data is received using a protocol including a packet that number error contains conversion variable fixed number of data and variable number of digits the corresponding data corresponding is O bytes 0 digits or exceeds the maximum number of digits 7D1AH Data length In the data received from the counterpart device the Length Check the packet format of the counterpart device to error value does not match the data length of the conversion confirm that the conversion variable is set correctly variable s llCheck the data sent from the counterpart device to confirm that The Length value is correct Any of the data corresponding to the conversion variable is not missing 7D1BH Value range When data is received using a protocol including a packet that Check the data sent from the counterpart device error contains conversion variable the corresponding data exceeds MCheck the packet format of the counterpart device to the ran
280. speed and then execute completes receiving process communication again Check if momentary power failure has occurred on the station with the CPU module using the special register SD1005 If momentary power failure has occurred remove the cause 7F68H Framing error The stop bit settings do not match Match the settings of the CPU module with that of the A disturbance occurred in the line due to power supply ON counterpart device OFF of the target station Take measures against noise There is noise on the line In the multi drop connection insert an interlock so e In the multi drop connection data is sent simultaneously that data is not sent simultaneously from multiple from multiple devices devices 7F69H Parity error The parity bit settings do not match A disturbance occurred in the line due to power supply ON OFF of the target station There is noise on the line e In the multi drop connection data is sent simultaneously from multiple devices 7F6AH Buffer full error The receive buffer overflowed and received data was skipped Perform a predefined protocol including data reception to clear the receive buffer TFF2H Predefined The instruction cannot be executed with the current Correct the setting value of the predefined protocol protocol setting predefined protocol setting error 202 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 9 Troubleshooting i MError flags The operation err
281. ss e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When the independent grounding cannot be performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the following LAFX5U User s manual Hardware FXS5UC User s manual Hardware Other amp O Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed Other equipment O e The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 2 mm or larger The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible 3 6 Communication Setting For the FX5 communication settings of this function parameters are set using GX Works3 For details about GX Works3 refer to LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual Setting of parameter differs according to the module used The procedure for each module is as follows Built in RS 485 port CH1 TZ Navigation Window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt 485 Serial Port Window The following screen will be displayed if MC Protocol is set for the communication protocol type llBasic Settings O Commumcation Protoca Type it LU ie nu eie er ns mm Communication Protocol Type MO Protocol Advanced Settings Set detailed setting Data Length ibit Parity Bit Odd Stop Bit ibit Baud Rate 9 600bps Sum Check Code Not Added lBlFixed Setting 7 Staton Peenber Set an
282. t number 5 Verification match Receive packet number 6 Verification match Receive packet number 7 Verification match Receive packet number 8 The result of executed S P CPRTCL instruction is stored When two or more protocols are executed the execution result of the protocol executed last is stored 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Error completion error code The number of protocols executed by the S P CPRTCL instruction is stored The execution of the protocol where an error has occurred is also counted in the number of executions If the setting of setting data or control data contains an error 0 is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed first the receive packet number successful in verification match is stored If the communication type is receive only 0 is stored If an error occurs during execution of the first protocol 0 is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed second the receive packet number successful in verification match is stored If the communication type is receive only 0 is stored If an error occurs during execution of the second protocol 0 is stored If the number of protocols executed is less than 2 0 is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed third the receive packet number successful in verification mat
283. t the switch to 100 Q Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD H r For crossover wiring of a shielded cable using the SG terminal FX5 485ADP set the terminal 2 SG selector switch to the right ON to change jm terminal 2 to SG With this setting analog inputs to terminal 2 JA JEE become invalid soe IVA JE SR LENA si 5 RDA edi Ui POUT RDB RAN LS se AS RE e sc RDB ET ETE RDA gt To next station inverter 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring 87 88 When one inverter is connected 2 wire type Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Twisted pair cable 0 3 mm or more ee C Crossover Inverter e When multiple up to 16 inverters are connected 2 wire type Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Built in RS 485 port Set the termination resistor selector switch to 100 Q Terminal block EM za Connect them to the BEE amen serial port of the PLC 5 5 fe Terminal array E m 95 65 65 6 amp 9 2 05 65 6 Set the termination resistor selector switch of the farthest FX5 485 BD inverter to 100 Q FX5 4
284. t when the project is changed to an editable project on the protocol setting screen 2 WhenOis set infinite wait is set The communication parameters can be set for multiple protocols by clicking the Communication Parameter Batch Setting button and setting protocol No range receive setting and send setting 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 73 6 6 Protocol Setting Operations for protocol setting data The protocol setting data can be written to the CPU built in memory or an SD memory card The written protocol data in the memory can be read and verified The following describes the operations for the protocol setting data Writing protocol setting data Write the protocol setting data on the screen displayed by the following operation TZ Online gt Module Write Window The procedure to write the data is as follows Target Module Selection 1 Select a CPU module to which the protocol setting data Module Selection m is written from Module Selection Only the CPU module specified in specify connection destination connection of Target Memory cpu Built in Memory GX Works3 can be specified 2 Select the memory to which the protocol setting data is Please save in the protocol setting file because the data to be written to target memory does not include the following information to be written from Target Memory Non written Data in Target Memory Manufacturer Packet Name Protocol Detail
285. t which receiving is completed falls into the following 3 types Receiving is completed when one of the following conditions is satisfied e When the PLC receives the amount of receive data specified by the RS2 instruction The terminators sum check and CR LF configured in the communication settings are received correctly a e oeoo Data teree e Data tee eee Data tee eee Data e When data receiving is suspended and the PLC does not receive the next data within the time out time the time out flag turns ON WOperation of time out flag When data receiving is suspended and the PLC does not receive the next within the time out time the time out flag is set to ON At this time the receiving completed flag is also set to ON The time out time can be set within 1 to 32767 ms If the set value is outside the range it operates as 10 ms Time out flag SM8565 SM8575 SM8585 SM8595 SM8409 SM8429 time out time SD8621 SD8631 SD8641 SD8651 ES Receive data is suspended Receiving K oaa D Time out time Set to OFF in program Timeout determination SD8621x1 ms 7 SM8565 SS Receiving completed Nq SM8562 a 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 14 5 Programming T The time out flag does not automatically turn OFF Reset using program While it remains ON the PLC cannot receive the next set of data When the receiving completed flag is set to OFF the time out flag is also set to OFF Using this function the PLC can
286. tation The link device corresponding to the local station number cannot Number of slave stations be secured If the error occurs at the same as 05H 15H is Station number settings stored Link device head number 7715H Insufficient link device points for local station error The specified slave station does not exist Wiring Power Station number settings 7721H Slave station no response error An unexpected slave station responded to the request by the Station number settings master station L E The counter value included in the parameter data is different from Wiring the count value given by a slave station L LS Before parameters had been received sending request was Wiring received from the master station Power M Master station L Slave station 1 Not supported for data transfer sequence error 2 Station in which error occurred 8 Any slave station other than the slave station in which error occurred 2 9 Related Devices 7722H Station number error in slave station 7723H Counter error in slave station 7731H Parameter not received T List of related devices Specialrelay BFX5 only SM8500 Serial communication error Turns ON when serial communication error of CH1 occurs M L e CH1 Station 1 to 7 SM8510 Serial communication error Turns ON when serial communication error of CH2 occurs M L O CH2 Station 1 to 7 SM8520 Serial communication error Turns O
287. ted Reference Hexadecimal 15H Decimal 21 ASCII hexadecimal 51 35H 31H 510 35H 31H 30H 5100 35H 31H 30H 30H ASCII decimal Sy 12 31H 32H 120 31H 32H 30H 1200 31H 32H 30H 30H HEX ES 1500H 150000H 15000000H One s complement is designated One s complement for 0000 0015H FFFF FFEAH When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FFEAH decimal 65514 ASCII hexadecimal ES O y O AE 41H 45H AEF 41H 45H 46H AEFF 41H 45H 46H 46H ASCII decimal rs 41 34H 31H 415 34H 31H 35H 4155 35H 35H 31H 34H HEX BAF FH EAFFFFH EAFFFFFFH Two s complement is designated Two s complement for 0000 0015H FFFF FFEBH When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FFEBH decimal 65515 ASCII hexadecimal BE 42H 45H BEF 42H 45H 46H BEFF 42H 45H 46H 46H ASCII decimal EN 51 35H 31H 515 35H 31H 35H 5155 35H 31H 35H 35H HEX BFF EBFFFFH EBFFFFFFH Data Flow Byte Swap No complement calculation is designated Reference Hexadecimal 15H Decimal 21 One s complement is designated One s complement for 0000 0015H FFFF FFEAH When Code Type is ASCII Decimal the lower one word is extracted and converted from hexadecimal to decimal hexadecimal FFEAH decimal 65514 2 2 6 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protoco
288. ted Devices b4 Baud rate b7 b6 b5 b4 b5 0 0 1 1 300 bps b6 0 1 0 0 b7 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 2400 bps 0 1 1 1 4800 bps 600 bps 1 0 0 0 9600 bps 1200 bps 1 0 0 1 19200 bps 1 0 1 0 38400 bps 1 0 1 1 57600 bps 1 1 0 1 115200 bps b10 Control mode b12 b11 b10 b11 0 0 0 Not provided RS 232C interface b12 0 0 1 Standard mode RS 232C interface 0 1 0 Interlink mode RS 232C interface 0 1 1 Modem mode RS 232C interface 1 1 0 RS 485 full duplex bi directional RS 485 interface 1 1 1 RS 485 half duplex bi directional RS 485 interface b15 CR LF CR and LF are not added CR LF added 1 When using non protocol communication O fixed Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool They are cleared by turning the PLC power OFF ON RUN gt STOP or by resetting the system SD8560 R Read only Precauions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool This stores the amount of data already received These devices store the counted value in 8 bit 1 byte units SD8561 SD8571 SD8581 SD8591 SD8403 SD8423 These devices store the amount of data already received R Read only Precautions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 1 5 9 Related Devices 6 The communication parameter content set in the commu
289. ted devices The devices described below are used in non protocol communication The FX3 Series compatible device operates only the channel which is specified in the SM SD settings Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication These flags are for check of the serial communication error SM8500 SM8510 SM8520 SM8530 SM8063 SM8438 Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication R Read only After a device above turns ON the error code is stored in the corresponding device below SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored SD8510 SD8520 SD8530 SD8063 SD8438 code Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool Serial communication error does not turn OFF even if the communication is restored to normal state The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF ON RUN gt STOP system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 157 5 9 Related Devices SM8560 R Read only e For RS 232C While the control line is set to the standard or interlink mode in the communication parameter when the control line DR DSR turns OFF while sending data the sending wait flag turns ON For RS 485 The sending wait flag does not turns ON Precauions When setting these devices to ON set the drive condition with a pulse When these devices are set to ON by SET instruction th
290. tem These devices store the contents of headers 1 to 4 set in the communication settings Page 136 When the headers are set to Added in the communication settings the headers are added to the send and receive data Up to four headers can be added in each channel When data is sent the data set in the headers is added at the head of the specified send data S x R W Read Write When data is received data receiving begins when the data set in the headers is received Header ma 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 5 9 Related Devices 63 Precautions Even if the headers are set to Added in the communication settings if the first header value is OOH this is the Do Not Add state The area before 00H in 1 byte units is used to set the headers Do not change the headers while the RS2 instruction is being driven To change the value do so before the RS2 instruction is driven while off The change is enabled when the RS2 instruction is drive They are cleared by turning the PLC power OFF ON RUN gt STOP or by resetting the system terminator These devices store the contents of terminators 1 to 4 set in the communication settings Page 136 When the terminators are set to Added in the communication settings the terminators are added to the send and receive data Up to four terminators can be added in each channel When data is sent the data set in
291. ter describes predefined protocol support function serial communication protocol support function For details about built in Ethernet protocol support function refer to LT 1Ethernet communication manual 6 1 Function Summary With predefined protocol support function data can be sent and received between the counterpart device and CPU module according to the protocol of the counterpart device Predefined protocol support function uses the S P CPRTCL instruction The S P CPRTCL instruction can simultaneously communicate on 2 channels by specifying the channels Up to eight protocols can be executed consecutively 1 send packet 16 receive packets in one protocol he protocol can use the general purpose protocol library which is pre registered in the serial communication protocol support tool Additional protocols can be registered e Data transfer is enabled when the connected equipment supports non protocol serial communication e The overall distance is 1200 m maximum Applies only when configured by FX5 485ADP GBS Counterpart device Specify protocol to execute in dedicated instruction and communicate by instruction execution Set the necessary protocol and write in protocol setting data to the CPU module p E Protocol Manufacturer Model Protocol Name Sommunicanon Packet Name Packet Setting o Type MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FREQROL Series H7B RD Operation Mode Send amp Receive EB H7B RD Operation Mode Variabl
292. th on the line 1 Send packet Stores the transmit data Receive packet Stores the receive data Data storage area n The unit of data length is byte Stores the data length on the line 1 92 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting llSettable devices Settable devices to data storage area is follows Device Setting range Remarks Input 0 to 1023 When the assignment has been changed the devices including the one having the maximum device number after the change can be accessed 0 to 32767 Output Internal relay Latch relay Link relay File register Link register Data register 0 to 7999 Considerations for configuring packet element Multiple Non conversion variable Fixed length elements can be placed in a packet and multiple Non conversion variable Variable length elements can also be placed in a send packet However only one Non conversion variable Variable length can be placed in a receive packet and one of the following requirements need to be met Place any of the following items immediately after the non conversion variable Static data Terminator Check code Static data Check code Terminator Place length before a non conversion variable and include the non conversion variable in the calculating range In addition two or more of the following four elements cannot be placed in the same packet e Variable number of data Conversion variable e Fixed number o
293. the SD and RD LEDs of the used serial port are flashing If the LEDs are OFF refer to the troubleshooting L Page 33 below 3 Setthe inputs XO to X3 to ON or OFF in the master station and confirm that the outputs YOOO to YOO3 turn ON or OFF in each slave station 4 Operate the inputs XO to X3 of each slave station to check that the master station output YO to Y3 or the slave station output Y4 to Y7 Y10 to Y17 Y34 to Y37 turns ON Test program for communication master station RUN monitor SM400 IR i MOV K1X0 D1000 Step for writing information from the master station master station slave station The contents of XO to X3 in the master station are transferred to outputs Y in each slave station MOV Steps for reading information from a slave station 7 slave station master station K1Y10 By using link devices read information from all other slave stations The table below shows the link devices to be used Slave station No Output Y ev fe ev Specify device numbers for the connected slave stations NN OD oy AJ ws NM gt END 2 N N NETWORK 2 Programming 27 Test program for communication slave station Determine the station number of each slave station and then transfer a program corresponding to the station number to each slave station Assign station numbers from 1 in the ascending order Use one station number only once Do not skip station numbers RUN monitor SM4
294. the left during adjustment and set a value from 1 to retries 10 during operation Pr 336 RS 485 communication check time 9999 Set the value shown on the left during adjustment and set a value in interval accordance with the system specification during operation llCautions during Setting Caution for setting the RS 485 communication check time interval Pr 336 During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed 9999 periodically When communication with the PLC is not executed 0 Set the communication time in the following cases 1 to 9998 When it is necessary to monitor absence of communication for a certain time and stop the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed continuously When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point when the PLC mode is changed from RUN STOP 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 6 Inverter Communication Settings gt ti aS needed The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters For the method of use refer to LAthe respective inverter manual Pr 342 Communication EEPROM write 0 or 1 0 Write to EEPROM and RAM selection 1 Write to RAM only Pr 338 Communication operation command O or 1 0 PLC rights 1 Outside Pr 339 Communication speed command 0 or 1 0 PLC rights 1 Outside FREQROL F700PJ E700 D700 E700EX series P Connection destination PU port FR E7TR m
295. the terminators is added at the end of the specified send data and data send x R W Read Write When data is received receiving is completed when the data set in the terminators is received Terminator a Even if the terminators are set to Added in the serial communication settings if the first terminator value is OOH this is the Do Not Add state The area before OOH in 1 byte units is used to set the terminators Do not change the terminators while the RS2 instruction is being driven To change the value do so before the RS2 instruction is driven while off The change is enabled when the RS2 instruction is drive They are cleared by turning the PLC power OFF gt ON RUN gt STOP or by resetting the system unication operation mode Stores the communication function code used in the serial communication under execution SD8513 SD8523 SD8533 SD8419 SD8439 R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool SD8503 0 MELSOFT Connection 2 MC protocol 3 N N Network Communication 5 Non protocol Communication 7 Inverter Communication 9 MODBUS RTU Communication 12 Predefined protocol support Other than above Not used These devices store 5 while RS2 instruction is being driven or not as long the communication mode has not changed 164 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 9 Related Devices 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION This chap
296. through communication in accordance with RS 485 One of three patterns can be selected according to the number of devices to be linked Data link is automatically updated between up to eight FX5 PLCs or FX3 PLCs The total extension distance is 1200m maximum only when the FX5 485ADP is used in the configuration e FX5 PLCs can set head device number for internal relay M and data register D for link 8 units 1200m maximum Distance varies depending on communication equipment type FX5 PLC FX5 PLC FX3 PLC Master station Slave station Slave station No 2 Built in Built in RS 485 port RS 485 port Transfer Transfer direction Device numbers M200 direction MO to M63 M200 to M263 M1000 to M1063 M64 to M127 M264 to M327 M1064 to M1127 M128 to M191 M328 to M391 M448 to M511 M648 to M711 Device numbers D100 Device numbers D2000 D100 to D107 D2000 to D2007 D110 to D117 D2010 to D2017 D10 to D17 D120 to D127 D2020 to D2027 D20 to D27 D170 to D177 D2070 to D2077 D70 to D77 The link information can be monitored in the master station and all slave stations The figure above shows the maximum number of linked devices There are differences in specification depending on the selected link pattern and FX Series 14 2 N N NETWORK 2 1 Outline of System 2 2 Procedures before Operation The flow chart below shows the N N Network setting procedures up until data link 1 Check commun
297. tion match is stored If the communication type is receive only 0 is stored If an error occurs during execution of the seventh protocol 0 is stored If the number of protocols executed is less than 7 0 is stored If receiving is included in the communication type of the protocol that has been executed eighth the receive packet number successful in verification match is stored If the communication type is receive only O is stored If an error occurs during execution of the eighth protocol 0 is stored If the number of protocols executed is less than 8 O is stored 1 User Data to be set by users before the execution of the S P CPRTCL instruction System Data to which the CPU module sets the execution result of the S P CPRTCL instruction 192 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 8 Programming 0 1t08 Execution protocol Specify the number of the protocol to be executed first 1 to 64 number 1 Execution protocol Specify the number of the protocol to be executed second 0 1 to 64 number 2 Execution protocol Specify the number of the protocol to be executed third 0 1 to 64 number 3 Execution protocol Specify the number of the protocol to be executed fourth 0 1 to 64 number 4 Execution protocol Specify the number of the protocol to be executed fifth 0 1 to 64 number 5 Specify the number of the protocol to be executed sixth Specify the number of the protocol to be executed seventh Specify the nu
298. tively call multiple models or versions Example FX5U 32MR ES FX5U 32MT ES gt FX5U 32MLI ES For details on the FX3 devices that can be connected with the FX5 refer to FX5 User s Manual Hardware Terms MDevices FX5 FX3 FX5 CPU module FX5U CPU module FX5UC CPU module Extension module e FX5 extension module e FX3 extension module Extension module extension cable type Extension module extension connector type I O module Input module Input module extension cable type Input module extension connector type Output module Output module extension cable type Output module extension connector type Input output modules Powered input output module Extension power supply module FX5 extension power supply module e FX3 extension power supply module Intelligent module Intelligent function module e FX5 intelligent function module e FX3 intelligent function module Simple motion module Expansion board Communication board Expansion adapter Communication adapter Analog adapter Bus conversion module Bus conversion module extension cable type Bus conversion module extension connector type Battery Peripheral device GOT Description Abbreviation of FX5 PLCs Generic term for FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Generic term for FX5U CPU module and FX5UC CPU module Generic term for FX5U 32MR ES FX5U 32MT ES FX5U 32MT ESS FX5U 64MR ES FX5U 64MT ES FX5U 64MT
299. tocol selection Mitsubishi inverter computer link protocol 79 D000 Operation mode selection External operation mode is selected when power is turned ON 340 D001 Communication startup mode selection 1 Network operation mode 333 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 6 Inverter Communication Settings n operation Parameters that must be adjusted for test operation and operation are as follows 335 N035 RS 485 communication number of 9999 Set the value shown on the left during adjustment and set a value retries from 1 to 10 during operation 336 N036 RS 485 communication check time 9999 Set the value shown on the left during adjustment and set a value in interval accordance with the system specification during operation llCautions during setting Caution for setting the RS 485 communication check time interval Pr 336 P NO36 During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed 9999 periodically When communication with the PLC is not executed 0 Set the communication time in the following cases 1 to 9998 When it is necessary to monitor absence of communication for a certain time and stop the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed continuously When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point when the PLC mode is changed from RUN STOP The table below shows parameters to be considered when using system configuration and inverters in various ways For the method of use
300. tor Inverter Modular jack 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 4 5 Wiring 85 e When multiple up to 16 inverters are connected 4 wire type Connect a termination resistor of 100 Q 1 2 W not supplied Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 to the most distant inverter Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Distributor Distributor Distributor Cable an By Og DQM E Ns PU RS 485 Connector Inverter PU RS 485 Connector Connector Inverter Inverter iz For the pin arrangement in the connector refer to the connection diagram for one inverter When one inverter is connected 2 wire type E700 Series only PU RS 485 SIASIO 1 Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Q Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Distributor Connect a termination resistor of 100 Q 1 2 W not supplied When seen from inverter front receptacle side 8 PU RS 485 Connector Inverter Modular jack e When multiple inverters are connected up to 16 2 wire type E700 Series only Connect a termination resistor of 100 Q 1 2 W not supplied to the most distant inverter Set the termination resistor selector switch to 110 Built in RS 485 port FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Distributor Distributor Distributor 10BASE T Cable PU RS 485 Connector Inverter PU RS
301. truction codes and the parameters that can be communicated Inverter Operation monitoring The table below shows instruction codes for reading the inverter which can be specified by IVCK instruction Page 103 operand s2 and their contents Any instruction codes not shown in the table below may cause communication errors Use the instruction codes shown below only For the instruction codes refer to LAthe pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 1 4 4 Specifications T H74 Error contents O H75 H76 H77 H7F These codes cannot be specified in s2 in IVCK instruction They are automatically processed H6C when a second parameter specification code is specified in IVRD instruction 1 Please set 0 to instruction code HFF Link parameter expansion setting just before the IVCK instruction when reading frequency When 0 is not set reading of the frequency may not be executed normally The table below shows instruction codes for writing to the inverter which can be specified by IVDR instruction 1 gt Page 105 operand s2 and their contents For the instruction codes refer to LLJthe pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual All parameter clear 1 The instruction code HFD inverter reset does not request a response from the inverter Accordingly even if inverter reset is executed in a station number to which an inverter is not connected e
302. ule When two or more errors occur at the same time priority is given to the error code with the smallest number and the error code with the smallest number is sent Further in case of an occurrence of the following errors initialize the entire transmission sequence 4000H to An error detected by the CPU unit Refer to following manual and take measures 4FFFH An error occurring outside communication by MC LAFX5U User s manual Hardware protocol LAFX5UC User s manual Hardware 7143H Device number Head device address is outside the range Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify error it if necessary and then execute communication again 7164H Request There is an error in the request contents or the device Check the sent message request contents of the counterpart contents error specification method equipment modify it if necessary and then execute communication again 7167H Disabledin RUN Write command is specified when write not possible in Change the settings to make writing in RUN mode possible mode RUN mode is set and then execute communication again 7168H A command that cannot be executed in RUN mode is STOP the CPU and then execute communication again specified 7E40H Command error A non existing command or sub command is specified Check the sent message of the counterpart equipment modify it if necessary and then execute communication again 7E41H Data length The number of points that can b
303. um check code does not match with the calculated sum check code The received horizontal parity code does not match with the calculated horizontal parity code The received error check code does not match with the calculated error check code 7F26H Command error At the time of registering a remote password a different After the unlock process ends normally execute command is received before unlock process communication 7F40H Timeout error Time is up for the no reception monitor time timer 0 Verify that there is no data omission in the reception error Verify that the reception is not stopped due to DTR control etc TF67H Overrun error The following data is received before FX5 PLC Reduce the communication speed and then execute completed receiving process communication again 7F68H Framing error A disturbance occurred in the line due to power supply Clear the error information by error initialization request YE ON OFF of the counterpart station YF Further when executing communication by non There is noise on the line protocol execute the input command and never read the data At the time of multi drop connection the data is sent that is not required simultaneously from multiple equipments Take counter measures for noise Sum check error Check the sum check code of the counterpart equipment Check the horizontal parity code of the counterpart equipment Check CRC 16 of the counterpart equipment
304. unication Half Duplex Bi Page 148 directional Communication Sum Check Code Added Not Added Page 149 Control Procedure Format 1 CR LF Not Added Format 4 CR LF Added Page 141 Fixed Setting 8 bit Process Mode 8 bit Mode 16bit Mode Page 143 Time out Period 1 to 32767 ms Page 147 10 ms when set to a value outside the range SM SD Setting FX3 Series Compatibility SM SD for Compatible Disable CH1 CH2 Refer to the following 1 Only in the case of communication board CH2 2 Valid when the header setting is Added 8 Valid when the terminator setting is Added Advanced Settings FX3 Series compatible SM SD When using the FX3 Series compatible SM SD storage area set to use special devices for either the FX3 Series CH1 or CH2 FX3 Series compatible devices corresponding to the specified channel can be used For details refer to the L gt Page 156 Related Devices 138 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 6 Communication Settings 5 Programming This section explains how to create programs for non protocol communication using RS2 instruction and how such programs operate For details on related devices refer to L Page 156 Related Devices For communication settings refer to Page 136 Communication Settings Serial data communication This section explains the function operation and programming method of the RS2 instruction For details on the expression and executable format of the RS2 instruction refer to the
305. unset error HEX Fi ed Number of D ata Number of data 1 Digit 2 Padded Conversion Variable Inverter Station Number D AWword Delimier none 3 Static Data InstructionCode JV TENQBye o 0 4 Static Data WaitingTimes OflBwe o 5 CheckCode SumCheck biectelement2 4 Sum Check HEX No calculation Forward 2Byte IB Terminator CRB oo Change Type Add New Copy Paste Delete The setting item of above screen is follows Protocol No Displays the protocol number of the selected protocol e Protocol Name The The protocol name of the selected protocol name The protocol name of the selected protocol the selected protocol Protocol Type The protocol type of the selected protocol Send E or receive packet Packet Name The packet name of the selected packet x amp e Arbitrarily 32 characters 1 76 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 7 Packet Setting Bl ist of elements Element No These numbers indicate the order of elements When x 1 to 32 any element number is changed the elements are arranged in the numerical order Element Type The type of each element is displayed For details refer X m to the subsequent section of each element Header Terminator MData area Length Static Data Non conversion Variable Conversion Variable e Check Code Non verified reception O Arbitariy 32 cha
306. urn ON OFF by program or engineering tool Instruction execution completed is also used as the execution completed flag for other instructions such as positioning instructions When using instruction execution completed provide the contact just under the instruction whose execution completion is to be checked Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication These flags are used to check the serial communication error Turns ON when a parity error overrun error or framing error occurs during communication with inverters or when an inverter communication error occurs Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication Devices do not turn OFF even when normal communication is restored SM8500 R Read only After a device above turns ON the error code is stored in the corresponding device below SD8500 When a serial communication error occurs the error code is stored Precautions Do not turn ON or OFF with program or engineering tool Serial communication error do not turn OFF even if normal communication is restored The devices turn OFF when power is turned OFF gt ON STOP5RUN system is reset or SM50 Error Detection Reset Completion is turned ON These devices remain ON while communicating with inverter by an inverter communication instruction SM8920 Remains ON while communication with an inverter is executed by an inverter communication instruction
307. used R Read only Do not change the value with program or engineering tool These devices store 12 while S P CPRTCL instruction is being driven or not as long the communication mode has not changed The reflected status after the protocol setting data has been written is stored For details of operation refer to L Page 194 Information to judge whether the predefined protocol can be executed or not SD9102 0 Normal 1 Abnormal R Read only Precauions Do not change the value with program or engineering tool The written protocol setting data is reflected when power is turned OFF ONor system is reset 206 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 6 10 Related Devices fined protocol setting data error When a protocol setting data error was detected information to identify the error position is stored llPredefined protocol setting data error information Protocol No When a protocol setting data error was detected the number of the protocol where the error has occurred is stored Starting from the smallest protocol number protocols are checked in order and the number of the protocol where the error has first been detected is stored SD9120 0 Normal 1 to 64 Protocol No 65535 Not identifiable R Read only 1 Damaged protocol setting data failures of the memory built in the CPU memory module or the SD memory card can be a factor that causes a setting value to be not
308. ut control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Construct an interlock circuit in the program so that the whole system always operates on the safe side before executing the control for data change to the PLC in operation Read the manual thoroughly and ensure complete safety before executing other controls for program change parameter change forcible output and operation status change of the PLC in operation Otherwise the machine may be damaged and accidents may occur due to erroneous operations WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover provided as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock The temperature rating of the cable should be 80 C or more NWARNING Make sure to wire the screw terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock equipment failures a short circuit wire breakage malfunctions or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual Tightening torque should follow the specification
309. ve the next data Interlink mode RS2 instruction OFF execution SD TXD Send data Sending request DR DSR Other device FX Sending wait flag RD RXD Receive data Time out judge time Time out judge flag Turned off during receiving when No of received bytes 30 is received even if receiving is not completed Receiving complete flag ER DTR FX other device The sequence program resets the flag This flag must be turned off to receive the next data 1 On the external equipment side set the DR DSR signal to ON when the external equipment is ready to receive The FX5 PLC sends the send data when both the DR DSR signal and the sending request turn ON 152 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 5 Programming 2 In the interlink mode the PLC sets ER DTR to OFF when the amount of data already received becomes Number of bytes to be received 30 and asks the external equipment to stop sending After this send request the PLC can only receive up to 30 characters and no more so the external equipment temporarily stops sending and then sends the remaining data after the ER DTR signal turns ON again When sending is stopped the receiving complete flag turns ON after the time out check time and receiving completes When sending is not stopped the PLC finishes receiving after it has received the final send data or 30 characters Accordingly make sure that the amount of receive data is 30
310. version variable cannot be modify it if necessary and then execute error converted to binary numbers communication again When data is received using a protocol including a packet e If the protocol was edited check the packet format of of check code ASCII hexadecimal or ASCII decimal the the counterpart device to check that the set values of data corresponding to the check code cannot be converted the conversion sign character number of decimals to binary numbers delimiter and number of digit for conversion variable are correct e If the protocol was edited check the packet format of the counterpart device to check that the setting for the code type and data length of check code are correct 7F24H Sum check The received sum check does not match with the calculated Check the sum check of the counterpart device error sum check Check the horizontal parity code of the counterpart The received horizontal parity code does not match with the device calculated horizontal parity code Check CRC 16 of the counterpart device The received check code does not match with the Milf the protocol was edited check if the following calculated check code values match the packet format of the counterpart device Processing method or code type of the check code Data length Data flow Complement calculation Calculating range TF67H Overrun error The following data was received before the CPU module Reduce the communication
311. ving llSend only RS2 instruction OFF ON The message 1 is interrupted i execution because DSR is turned off SD TXD Send data Sending request OFF DR DSR OFF 4 Other device FX Sending wait flag OFF LR ER DTR N WA FX other device OFF Turned on when ready to be transmitted at RS2 sending is completed instruction execution in in the normal mode the normal mode MReceive only The DR DSR signal is not used RS2 instruction execution er RD RXD Receive data 4 Time out judgement time Time out flag OFF Turned off usually on completion of receiving Receiving complete flag ER DTR FX other device The sequence program resets the flag Turned on when ready to J med ol Cue E a This flag must be turned off to receive the next data be transmitted at RS2 format error or full instruction execution buffer during receiving even if receiving is not completed 5 NON PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION 1 1 5 Programming 9 Modem mode RS2 instruction execution OFF ON SD TXD essage 4 Message M Send data 1 imal B 7 N N W NI sending request is sent in the modem mode ER DTR RD RXD Turned on when a Receive data s os Receiving o complete flag ON FX other device OFF A SEDER EE S Other device gt FX OFF ON Turned off when a NV The sequence program resets the flag This flag must be turned off to recei
312. wire 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 2 to 0 5 mm 0 22 to 0 25 Nm AWG24 to 20 AWG24 to 20 FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port One wire 0 3 to 0 5 mm 0 3 to 0 5 mm FX5 485 BD AWG22 to 20 AWG22 to 20 Do not tighten terminal screws with torque beyond the specified range Otherwise it may cause equipment failure or malfunction BWire end treatment With regard to the cable end treatment use a stranded cable or solid cable as is or use a wire ferrule with insulating sleeve When using a stranded cable or solid cable as is Twist the end of stranded wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Please do not solder plate the ends of the cable c cp 5 mm 9 mm 0 27 0 36 4 INVERTER COMMUNICATION 1 4 5 Wiring 8 82 When using a wire ferrule with insulation sleeve Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the cable sheath select the proper cable according to the outline drawing Insulating sleeve Contact area Insulating sleeve Contact area Pn crimp area p crimp area 6 mm 8 mm 2 to 2 5 mm en 2 6 mm or 0 07 to 0 09 10 5 to 12 mm 0 1 o d4Amm 0 41 to 0 47 0 55 lt Reference gt FX5U CPU module built in RS 485 port Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 6WH CRIMPFOX 6 FX5UC CPU module built in RS 485 port Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX 6T F FX5 485 BD FX5 485ADP Tool For tightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver with
313. ype to Add Reference Type Select from Predefined Protocol Library Please select manufacturer model and protocol name from Protocol to Add Protocol to Add Protocol 1 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FREGR L Series Co om The setting item of above screen is follows Predefined Protocol Library User Protocol Library Add New Select a protocol type Protocol No Set the number of the protocol to be added Manufacturer Set the manufacturer s name of the counterpart device X X Manufacturer s name registered in the library registered in the library Model Set the model of the counterpart device registered in the X X Model registered in the library of the selected manufacturer library of the selected manufacturer Protocol Name Set the protocol name of the counterpart device X X Protocol name registered registered in the library of the selected model with the library of the selected model O Required X Not required 1 Predefined Protocol Library The predefined protocol library offered by GX Works3 User Protocol Library The protocol library which a user registered 6 PREDEFINED PROTOCOL SUPPORT FUNCTION 1 1 6 6 Protocol Setting T Configuring detailed setting of protocols Set the send reception parameters of the added protocol Set the detailed setting of the protocol on the screen displayed by the following operation X Protocol setting screen gt Select a row of any protoco

MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User`s Manual (Serial Communication)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents